The longest running (and most popular) podcast for non-venture track startups, this show follow the stories of founders as they start, acquire, and grow SaaS companies. Hear when they fail, struggle, succeed, and take you with them through the tumultuous life of an entrepreneur. If you like Mixergy, This Week in Startups, or SaaStr, you’ll enjoy Startup for the Rest of Us.
Episode 698 | How to Launch a Million Dollar Business (With Noah Kagan)
In episode 698, Rob Walling interviews Noah Kagan, CEO of AppSumo. They discuss the importance of eliminating distractions, cover strategies that led to growth in Noah’s businesses, and share insights from growing YouTube channels. Noah also shares why he decided to write his new book, Million Dollar Weekend.
Episode Sponsor:
Is your outsourced development team dropping the ball?
Maybe you’ve worked with a team that just couldn't grasp your vision and needed constant oversight because they weren’t thinking strategically. Or maybe you ended up wasting hours micromanaging, often needing to jump on late-night calls across massive time zone differences to get alignment. And in the end, they delivered a sluggish app with a frustrating UI that didn’t come close to the solution you had envisioned. If any of that sounds familiar, you need to reach out to our sponsor - DevSquad.
DevSquad provides an entire development team packed with top talent from Latin America.
Your elite squad will include between 2 to 6 Full Stack Developers, a technical product manager, plus experts in product strategy, UI/UX design, DevOps, and QA - all working together to make your SaaS Product a success.
You can ramp up an entire product team fast, in your timezone, and at rates 75% cheaper than a comparable US-based team. And with DevSquad, you pay month to month with no long-term contracts.
Get the committed, responsive development team that your business deserves.
Visit DevSquad.com/startups and get 10% off the first three months of your engagement.
Topics we cover:
2:38 – Making good decisions, consistently
5:47 – Noah’s disappointment in selling Sumo
13:20 – Strategies and decisions that led to growth
15:46 – Focus on eliminating distractions
20:15 – Noah returns as AppSumo CEO
23:20 – Making the mistake of not listening to customers
26:55 –Growing a YouTube Channel to 1M+ subscribers
35:03 – The role of YouTube content in supporting AppSumo
37:11 – Building a million dollar business in a weekend
Links from the Show:
Register for MicroConf US in Atlanta, April 2024
Million Dollar Weekend by Noah Kagan
Noah Kagan (@noahkagan) | X
Born Standing Up: A Comic's Life by Steve Martin
Sumo
AppSumo
TidyCal
SendFox
KingSumo
Noah’s YouTube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit
1/30/2024 • 44 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode 697 | 7 Predictions for SaaS Bootstrappers in 2024
In episode 697, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he makes predictions for SaaS in 2024. His predictions focus on Vertical SaaS, emerging markets, the professionalization of No-Code, subscription fatigue, AI and more. At the end of the episode, he evaluates predictions he made over the past 10 years to see if they held up.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:32 – Opportunity in vertical SaaS
3:48 – SaaS will continue to grow in emerging markets
5:08 – Twitter changes hands in 2024?
6:56 – Subscription fatigue has little impact on adoption of B2B SaaS
8:13 – No-Code and Low-Code will undergo “professionalization”
10:24 – Is it hype, or is it not? How AI will continue to develop this year
14:11 – Will Stripe go public?
17:08 – Revisiting past predictions: SaaS, Twitter, VR, crypto, markets, & gadgets
Links from the Show:
Call for Pitches
TinySeed Portfolio
Start Small Stay Small
Dave Kellett (@davekellett) | X
Once.com
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
1/23/2024 • 31 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode 696 | The Truth about Product-Market Fit + Doing Sales as an Introvert (With Ruben Gamez)
In episode 696, Rob Walling and Ruben Gamez cover a variety of topics. They discuss how product market fit is achieved across customer segments and use cases, not simply broadly. Ruben shares how he approaches effective decision making and sales as an introvert. They wrap up by sharing how they evaluate candidates when hiring to build their teams.
Topics we cover:
4:47 – Product market fit, increasing average revenue per customer
7:58 – When did you know you had product market fit?
11:03 – Product market fit is a continuum, and use case specific
14:27 – Making hard decisions around product market fit
19:01 – Getting better at prioritizing and making hard decisions
27:38 – Doing sales as an introvert
33:09 – Building a functional team that gets stuff done
40:10 – Evaluating potential hires
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Sponsorships
Microconf Connect
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | X
SignWell
Episode 695 | Ideal Customers, Moving from B2C to B2B, and More Listener Questions (with Asia Orangio)
The SaaS Playbook
Dynamite Jobs
Who: The A Method for Hiring by Geoff Smart, Randy Street
Crucial Conversations by Joseph Grenny, Kerry Patterson, et al.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
1/16/2024 • 50 minutes, 4 seconds
Episode 695 | Ideal Customers, Moving from B2C to B2B, and More Listener Questions (with Asia Orangio)
In episode 695, Rob Walling and Asia Orangio answer listener questions. They take questions about ideal target customers, moving from B2C to B2B, and how to advertise for a product in a new space. They wrap up discussing the challenges of making freemium work while bootstrapping.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
4:06 – Adjusting your target customers to chase an opportunity
11:58 – Is translating marketing or educational content worth it?
16:46 – Moving from B2C to B2B
25:53 – Defining a cross-channel marketing approach
33:22 – Advertising for a product in new product category
41:40 – The issues with making freemium work while bootstrapping.
Links from the Show:
State of Independent SaaS Report
MicroConf Mastermind Program
Asia Orangio (@AsiaOrangio) | X
DemandMaven
Episode 681 | Why Launching a Second Product is Usually a Bad Idea
User Interviews
Episode 685 | 7 Things You Should Never Do (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Four Fits for $100M+ Growth by Brian Balfour
Brian Balfour (@bbalfour) | X
Reforge
Continuous Discovery Habits by Teresa Torres
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us
In episode 694, join Rob Walling as he recaps 2023. He reflects on growing TinySeed, MicroConf, the YouTube channel and this podcast. Rob also addresses his struggle with "arrival fallacy" and the continuous journey of success. Alongside the growth, he describes seeing burnout on the horizon, emphasizes the importances of addressing that early, and what it means for him and his team in 2024.
Episode Sponsor:
Going from an idea sketched on the back of a napkin to a robust, stable product requires a wide range of skills. You can spend ages looking for a one-in-a-million developer who can do it all, or you can quickly ramp up an entire product team to help you build and launch your product with our sponsor - DevSquad.
DevSquad provides an entire development team packed with top talent from Latin America.
Your elite squad will include between 2 to 6 Full Stack Developers, a technical product manager, plus experts in product strategy, UI/UX design, DevOps, and QA - all working together to make your SaaS Product a success.
You can ramp up an entire product team fast, in your timezone, and at rates 75% cheaper than a comparable US-based team. And with DevSquad, you pay month to month with no long-term contracts.
Take the hassle out of assembling and managing a sprawling team of freelancers and work with a group that’s ready to hit the ground running.
Visit DevSquad.com/startups and get 10% off your engagement.
Topics we cover:
4:20 – 2023 growth, launch of The SaaS Playbook
6:04 – Audience growth and supporting the mission
7:24 – Seeing burnout on the horizon, content calendars, and travel
11:49 – Dealing with burnout if you are experiencing it
14:18 – Adjusting travel schedules and amount
15:39 – Doing the things that “give me life”, sustainably
Links from the Show:
TinySeed
Get Your tickets for MicroConf Atlanta
State of Independent SaaS Report
The SaaS Playbook
Subscribe to the MicroConf YouTube channel
Start Small Stay Small
Episode 670 | Relying on Luck, Avoiding Burnout, and Bad Player vs. Bad Instrument (A Rob Solo Adventure)
The Entrepreneur’s Guide to Keeping Your Sh*t Together
The Zen Founder Guide to Founder Retreats
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!</
1/2/2024 • 19 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 693 | Building a Mid-Six-Figure SaaS in Less Than 3 Years
In episode 693, Rob Walling interviews Grant McConnaughey, founder of Postpone, a social media scheduling tool. They discuss the app's growth from inception to mid six figures, early growth tactics, a successful price increase, and platform risks with Reddit and Twitter. Grant also shares his experience going all-in on one idea, joining TinySeed, and reveals what he can still improve upon.
Topics we cover:
2:04 – Postpone starts off as part of a New Year’s resolution
4:13 – Validating and building the MVP to schedule content for Reddit
6:44 – Launching lean to slow growth in the beginning
9:10 – Doing things that don’t scale
10:53 – What were the reasons for joining TinySeed
13:06 – Full time focus and pricing changes enabled strong growth for Postpone
17:15 – Initial hesitation for raising prices at first
22:08 – Experiencing and overcoming Reddit platform risk
26:00 – What could Grant be doing better?
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Connect
TinySeed
Grant McConnaughey (@gmcconnaughey) | X
Postone’s MRR graph | X
Postpone
Adam Wathan (@adamwathan) | X
Traction by Gabriel Weinberg and Justin Mares
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
12/26/2023 • 28 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode 692 | Learn the Rules Like a Pro So You Can Break Them Like an Artist (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 692, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he addresses a variety of topics. He stresses revisiting your onboarding to evaluate your product’s “minimum path to awesome” and warns of conducting “mirror research” instead of market research. Rob also tackles why being the cheapest option is not always the best positioning.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:33 – Walking customers through signup to first value, revisit your onboarding
4:29 – The early entrepreneur’s trap: "We are pre-revenue still…”
8:31 – Not being the cheapest option
14:31 – Mirror research vs. market research
17:16 – Learn the rules like a pro so you can break them like an artist
Links from the Show:
Register for MicroConf US in Atlanta, April 2024
The SaaS Playbook
Episode 456 | Launching a 2nd Product + Revisiting Freemium with Ruben Gamez
TinySeed Mentors
Comic Lab
Episode 685 | 7 Things You Should Never Do (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Episode 687 | An 8th Thing You Should Never Do, Things That Don’t Scale, and More Rob Solo Topics
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: <a rel="noreferrer noopener" href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/startups-for-the-rest-of-us/id366931
12/19/2023 • 23 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 691 | Freemium, High-touch vs. Low-touch, Selling as an Introvert, and More Listener Questions
In episode 691, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions. He evaluates freemium as it relates to paying by the “honor system”, competing against big incumbents, and whether to sell using high-touch vs. low-touch strategies. Rob also recommends books for introverts looking for sales advice.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:01 – Charging for your product using the “honor system”
6:16 – Competing against big, entrenched incumbents
12:36 – Low-touch vs. high-touch sales strategies
17:01 – Selling as an introverted founder
20:45 – Skipping the “Stair Step” approach to quickly validate a SaaS
Links from the Show:
Startups For the Rest of Us | X
Subscribe to the MicroConf YouTube channel
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | X
The SaaS Playbook
TinySeed
Keap
Quiet: The Power of Introverts in a World That Can't Stop Talking by Susan Cain
The Introvert's Edge: How the Quiet and Shy Can Outsell Anyone by Matthew Pollard
The Stair Step Method of Bootstrapping
Episode 628 | The 5 P.M. Idea Validation Framework
Ask a Question on SFTROU
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please <a href="https://www.startupsfortherestofus.com/
12/12/2023 • 23 minutes, 4 seconds
Episode 690 | When Opt-in Email Could Be Spam, Collecting Customer Feedback, and More Listener Questions
In episode 690, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions. He advises on the ethical considerations of email marketing and answers how he would value a business when buying out a partner. He also addresses the best ways to collect customer feedback and the value of high-fidelity customer calls.
Episode Sponsor:
Going from an idea sketched on the back of a napkin to a robust, stable product requires a wide range of skills. You can spend ages looking for a one-in-a-million developer who can do it all, or you can quickly ramp up an entire product team to help you build and launch your product with our sponsor - DevSquad.
DevSquad provides an entire development team packed with top talent from Latin America.
Your elite squad will include between 2 to 6 Full Stack Developers, a technical product manager, plus experts in product strategy, UI/UX design, DevOps, and QA - all working together to make your SaaS Product a success.
You can ramp up an entire product team fast, in your timezone, and at rates 75% cheaper than a comparable US-based team. And with DevSquad, you pay month to month with no long-term contracts.
Take the hassle out of assembling and managing a sprawling team of freelancers and work with a group that’s ready to hit the ground running.
Visit DevSquad.com/startups and get 10% off your engagement.
Topics we cover:
2:59 – Emailing users about other projects you are working on
9:26 – Avoid sending spam-like emails
12:55 – Building a service vs. selling it as an affiliate
17:34 – SaaS evaluation after business partner falling out
21:25 – The best ways to collect customer feedback
25:36 – Determining which group of buyers to sell to, HOA’s or property managers
Links from the Show:
The SaaS Playbook
Ask a Question on SFTROU
Start Marketing the Day You Start Coding
The Stair Step Method of Bootstrapping
Quiet Light
FE International
Discretion Capital
MicroConf Connect
Producer Xander (@ProducerXander) | X
Episode 139 | 6 Questions You Should Ask In Your Customer Development Survey
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submi
12/5/2023 • 33 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode 689 | How to Keep Your Remote Team Motivated and Engaged
In episode 689, Rob Walling interviews Robert Cserti, co-founder of SessionLab. Robert and his team provide tools and resources for designing workshops and SessionLab operates fully remote. Rob and Robert discuss strategies for motivating remote teams, fostering team culture and communication, and being intentional about synchronous meetings and team bonding.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:01 – SessionLab, for creating workshops
3:42 – Keeping employee engagement high in remote teams, intentionally creating a workplace culture.
7:15 – Daily check-ins, synchronous vs. asynchronous communication
10:32 – Finding a cadence for synchronous calls and “all-hands”
13:20 – Planning in team retreats
15:18 – Meetings specifically for team bonding
18:42 – Regularly scheduled, random 1:1 social chats
21:05 – Experimenting with tools to facilitate communication and identify issues early
26:02 – Managing synchronous working overlap across time zones
Links from the Show:
Are you considering selling your SaaS business?
The Psychology of Exiting Your Company
Quiet Light
Robert Cserti | LinkedIn
SessionLab (@SessionLab) | X
SessionLab
SessionLab’s Library of facilitation techniques
Geekbot
Cozy Juicy Real
Donut
SpatialChat
If you have questions about start
11/28/2023 • 30 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode 688 | Growing Boot.dev From $6k to $110k in Monthly Revenue in 15 Months
In episode 688, Rob Walling interviews Lane Wagner, founder of Boot.dev. Boot.dev is a learning platform gamified to teach backend development. They discuss the journey of bootstrapping Boot.dev, its explosive growth, and its unique business model. Lane also shares challenges of running a B2C business, why he took some funding, and the significance of customer lifetime value over MRR in his business.
Topics we cover:
2:38 – Boot.dev seeing incredible growth
3:35 – Growing on YouTube with partnerships
5:42 – Teaching Python and Go as a B2C business
7:49 – “This is not really SaaS”, considering JTBD
11:18 – The beginnings of Boot.dev, serving the backend niche
14:21 – Gaining the confidence to quit the day job
15:51 – Deciding to raise funding and “mostly” bootstrap
20:31 – Enduring hardship before turning the corner on growth
26:38 – Finding the right revenue metric for the business
Links from the Show:
MicroConf US - Atlanta - April 21 - 23, 2024
Interested in Sponsoring MicroConf Content?
Subscribe for Exclusive Episodes
Lane from Boot.dev (@wagslane) | X
Boot.dev
Profitable, at last!
Purple Cow by Seth Godin
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
11/21/2023 • 32 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode 687 | An 8th Thing You Should Never Do, Things That Don't Scale, and More Rob Solo Topics
In episode 687, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where discusses a variety of topics. He revisits a recent episode to add one more item to the list of things founders should never do. Rob also offers a hot take on Meta’s new subscription plans and weighs in on a Hacker News post about doing things that don’t scale.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:50 – There’s one more thing that founders should never do
8:44 – Facebook and Instagram will offer a subscription for no ads
12:42 – Ask HN: Paul Graham’s “Do Things That Don’t Scale”
19:53 – Lugg, doing what it takes to prove out an idea
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Connect
Episode 685 | 7 Things You Should Never Do (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | X
TinySeed
Facebook and Instagram To Offer Subscription for No Ads in Europe
Ask HN: PG's 'Do Things That Don't Scale' manual examples?
Do Things that Don't Scale
Lugg
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify</
11/14/2023 • 23 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 686 | How Much is Enough?, Outsourcing Marketing, and More Listener Questions
In episode 686, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions. He answers how to evaluate monetary success, combat hedonic adaptation, and how to evaluate the capabilities of technical co-founders. Rob also discusses whether outsourcing sales and marketing is possible and considers some alternative no-code approaches.
Topics we cover:
4:20 – Success after stair-stepping, confronting hedonic adaptation
15:35 – Sales funnels, friction before demos, and collecting email addresses
19:24 – Outsourcing marketing and sales
23:54 – Evaluating the technical capabilities of your technical co-founder(s)
29:41 – Reducing the platform risk of developing in typical no-code tools
Links from the Show:
State of Independent SaaS Survey and Report
MicroConf Local in Austin
MicroConf Connect
Bernard Huang (@bernardjhuang) | X
WP Engine (@wpengine) | X
Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) | X
The Stair Step Method of Bootstrapping
Start Small, Stay Small: A Developer's Guide to Launching a Startup
The SaaS Playbook
This Took 11 Years to Be An "Overnight Success" - SaaS Exit Strategy
Once
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
11/7/2023 • 33 minutes, 6 seconds
Episode 685 | 7 Things You Should Never Do (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 685, Rob Walling goes solo to share his insights on 7 common mistakes that SaaS founders make. Be sure to listen to the end to hear Rob’s spicy take on launching a portfolio of products to see what sticks.
Episode Sponsor:
As a founder your plate is full. So when you have to hire devs, there’s no time to search for that perfect culture-fit, get-things-done developer. Lemon.io’s new product, Lemon Hire saves founders time by connecting them with a pipeline of 80K+ senior engineers. Each dev is filtered through a 4-step vetting process, available to interview within 48 hours of choosing, and backed by a 30-day replacement guarantee.
Find your great-fit candidates fast with Lemon Hire. Claim a special discount for our fans. Visit https://lemon.io/hire/, sign up, and mention “Startups” to receive $2000 off your first hire.
Topics we cover:
1:29 – Sign the National Association of Manufacturers Letter, Section 174
3:52 – Compiling a list of things founders shouldn’t do
6:49 – B2C applications, “the worst of all the worlds”
9:42 – Don’t build a second product if your first has stopped growing
10:40 – Defining a new category of software is usually a bad idea
19:59 – Avoid multi-language support
24:13 – Dig deep to find root causes beyond the symptoms
27:41 – The portfolio approach
Links from the Show:
The Small Software Business Alliance
MicroConf Remote
The SaaS Playbook
Dan Andrews (@TropicalMBA) | X
Episode 681 | Why Launching a Second Product is Usually a Bad Idea
Inbound Marketing by Brian Halligan and Dharmesh Shah
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
10/31/2023 • 36 minutes, 3 seconds
Episode 684 | Key Takeaways from MicroConf Europe 2023
In episode 684, Rob Walling is joined by Dr. Sherry Walling to share their experience from MicroConf Europe 2023 in Lisbon. They discuss a continued shift in MicroConf’s focus towards fostering founder connections and networking, and the value of face-to-face interactions. Rob and Sherry reflect on their own talks and highlight others by fellow founders and attendees.
Topics we cover:
1:28 – Reflecting on MicroConf locations
6:28 – Continuous event improvements, focus on community
9:41 – Michelle Hanson’s talk “Frameworks For Making Product and Strategic Company Decisions”
10:38 – Rob’s talk about the five stages of customer awareness
13:21 – Einar Vollset’s talk on applying AI iteratively to solve problems
15:07 – QuietLight’s live business valuation
16:39 – Attendee talks from Sophie, Johannes Akhison, and more
19:25 – Dr. Sherry Walling discusses motivational archetypes
22:46 – Steven Craven’s founder story
Links from the Show:
Rob Walling (@robwalling) | X
Sherry Walling (@sherrywalling) | X
Sherrywalling.com
Dr. Sherry Walling | YouTube
MicroConf Remote
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | X
Michele Hansen (@mjwhansen) | X
Powered by Search (@poweredbysearch) | X
David Newell | Quiet Light
thisissophie.com
Johannes Åkesson – “How Consulting Gave Me Time to Nail Product-Market Fit.”
Stephen Craven (@stephen_craven) | X
Stridist
Producer Xander (@ProducerXander) | X
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
10/24/2023 • 26 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 683 | Bringing on a Partner, Attending Trade Shows, Pre-launch Discounts, and More Listener Questions
In episode 683, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions. He addresses gathering feedback from customers that are reluctant to give it to you, whether to bring on a partner, and the value of going to in-person events. Rob also covers topics such as equity for advisors, pricing strategies, & productized services.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:56 – Gathering feedback from reluctant customers
8:47 – When to bring in other partners
12:45 – Weighing the positives and negatives of going to trade shows
15:36 – Staying energized and motivated
17:51 – Offering pre-launch discounts vs. offering value-added product
22:08 – Charging for products in different currencies
23:37 – Productized service, pricing, and pausing
26:40 – Fractional CTOs and equity grants
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Mastermind Matching
MicroConf Connect
The SaaS Playbook
Episode 671 | Working on What Matters, Left-handed Threads, and Being Lucky (A Rob Solo Adventure)
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
10/17/2023 • 28 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode 682 | The Pros and Cons of Large vs. Small Startup Events
In episode 682, Rob Walling interviews Alex Theuma, the founder of SaaStock, a conference for SaaS founders. They discuss the challenges of bootstrapping an event and the pros and cons of large startup events versus small startup events. Alex also shares his experience of building credibility and authority in the industry, the importance of maintaining a positive attendee experience, and ensuring financial sustainability.
Episode Sponsor:
Tired of searching endlessly for highly skilled software developers? CloudDevs is your solution. Gain access to over 8000 pre-vetted senior devs distributed across their Latin America and global talent pools.
All their remote developers work within your own time zone and can get onboarded within 24 hours.
The CloudDevs team can help you recruit full time hires, or part time, project based freelancers.
And every hire comes with a week-long free trial, making sure you get the right person for the job.
All of our listeners get a 15% discount on their first month of collaboration.
Hire trusted tech talent efficiently without breaking the bank by visiting CloudDevs.com.
Topics we cover:
2:44 – How Alex bootstrapped SaaStock in the early stages
4:32 – Laying the groundwork and building credibility
6:59 – Figuring out sponsor subsidies
8:53 – Reflecting on the first event, growing afterwards
12:59 – Event sizing and event types
19:44 – Setting up event programming
23:00 – Swapping crazy event stories
Links from the Show:
Microconf Mastermind Matching
SaaStock
SaaStock (@SaaStock) | X
SaaStock | LinkedIn
Alex Theuma (@alextheuma) | X
The SaaS Revolution Show
ChartMogul
Web Summit
ProfitWell
Dunbar's number
SaaS.City
Muck Rack
Patrick Campbell’s “Churn” talk
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: <a rel="noreferrer noopener" href="https://podcasts.apple.co
10/10/2023 • 27 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 681 | Why Launching a Second Product is Usually a Bad Idea
In episode 681, Rob Walling and Ruben Gamez go deep on the drawbacks of launching a second product. They both generally advise against doing so, as it can distract from the existing product. However they do share some successful attempts, strategic insights, how to approach feedback on second ideas, and the benefits for founders that beat the odds.
Topics we cover:
1:31 – When you should launch a second product
5:32 – Ruben’s experience growing Bidsketch and SignWell
9:45 – Responding to market pull, avoid the sunk cost fallacy
12:26 – Dividing attention between multiple products
16:40 – Choosing when to split focus
21:13 – Why a second product worked for Ruben and others
28:54 – Gauging your product intuition and getting outside feedback
32:50 – Avoiding bias when receiving feedback on your ideas
38:21 – Strategies and goals for adding a second product
42:50 – Cross selling multiple products
Links from the Show:
MicroConf US Tickets are on sale
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | X
Episode 499 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth – Part 1
Intelligent Editing
SignWell (@SignWellApp) | X
Bidsketch
SignWell
Stratosphere
finchat.io
David Cancel (@dcancel) | X
The SaaS Playbook
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
10/3/2023 • 50 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 680 | Problems vs. Solutions, Doing What it Takes, and More Listener Questions (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 680, Rob Walling goes solo again, covering a wide variety of topics including listening to customers, but not necessarily their solutions. He also cautions against making decisions based on one customer's feedback, but listening to the crowd. Finally, Rob highlights the importance of doing whatever it takes to succeed as a founder.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:52 – Paying attention to customer problems, not customer solutions
6:52 – Don’t listen to a customer, always listen to your customers
9:42 – Finding product market fit with limited information
13:01 – Identifying the appropriate time to grind out the work
19:18 – Don’t be above “taking out the trash”
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Connect
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | X
Ruben’s repost of @sequence_film
ComicLab (@ComicLabPodcast) | X
Dave Kellett (@davekellett) | X
Brad Guigar (@guigar) | X
The SaaS Playbook
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
9/26/2023 • 23 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode 679.5 | The Future of MicroConf (7 Announcements!)
In episode 679.5, Rob shares seven announcements about the future of MicroConf in the upcoming year.
Whether you're a long-time supporter or a new member of our crew of misfits, you know we're all about empowering bootstrapped SaaS entrepreneurs.
For nearly a decade, we've been fueling the permissionless entrepreneurship movement that's gripped founders worldwide - and we're nowhere close to finished.
Our next big leap is coming, and you won't want to miss it.
If you want to get the inside scoop, and to keep up to date as we roll out all of these offerings, head over to https://www.futureofmicroconf.com/.
Topics we cover:
2:03 – MicroConf Connect has leveled up, and is accepting new signups
2:41 – The return of The State of Independent SaaS Report
3:21 – Community voting for MicroConf Local 2024 cities
3:50 – New course launch, “Starting Up From Idea to Traction”
4:21 – MicroConf co-founder matching coming soon
4:58 – Host your team retreat with MicroConf’s Team Sync
5:28 – MicroConf Platinum Events for an exclusive and intimate experience
Links from the Show:
Sign up to get notified for MicroConf updates
MicroConf Connect
Rob Walling (@robwalling) | X
MicroConf (@MicroConf) | X
MicroConf YouTube Channel
MicroConf On Air Podcast
MicroConf Mastermind Matching
State of Independent SaaS (2022)
DemandMaven
MicroConf Local
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
9/21/2023 • 7 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 679 | Mock Features, A Failed Launch, Becoming a Freelancer, and More Listener Questions (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 679, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions. He discusses how “mock features” can be implemented to close deals with certain buying dynamics, how to recover from a failed launch, and the benefits of phased launches to minimize those. Rob also gives advice on creating organic content for a SaaS and suggests alternative marketing strategies to content creation. Finally, he covers what an engineer might encounter during an acquisition in a small startup and how to dive into consulting and contracting.
Topics we cover:
3:43 – Mock features for B2B SaaS
6:20 – Recovering from a failed launch
10:37 – Advice for a consumer-facing “vitamin” product
12:53 – Creating content to market SaaS tools
17:13 – Acquisitions for startups with small engineering teams
20:24 – Consulting for junior and mid-level engineers
Links from the Show:
The SaaS Playbook
MicroConf Connect Applications are Open!
Episode 671 | Working on What Matters, Left-handed Threads, and Being Lucky (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Ab Advany’s “Mock Features for B2B SaaS”
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
9/19/2023 • 26 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 678 | Selling a Half-Finished Product, Phased Launches, and More Listener Questions (Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 678, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions. He answers how he might find buyers for a half-done SaaS product, addresses platform risk that accompanies no-code development, and shares insights on bookkeeping for SaaS startups. Rob also details what frameworks new marketers should be looking into and gives advice on launching a new SaaS tool to an email list.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
3:10 – Where can I sell partially developed SaaS apps?
7:42 – Evaluating higher platform risk inherent in no-code apps
11:44 – Approaches to bookkeeping early on in your SaaS business
14:47 – Setting up a marketing engine for those with little experience
20:43 – Launching a new product to an email list with a phased approach
Links from the Show:
Apply for TinySeed
Join Us For A Big MicroConf Announcement
The SaaS Playbook
MicroConf Connect
Acquire.com
#1 Mistake No-Code SaaS Founders Make - Don't Build Without THIS
Episode 642 | The Pros and Cons of Building a No-Code MVP
Bench.co
Xero.com
Traction by Gabriel Weinberg, Justin Mares
Hacking Growth by Sean Ellis, Morgan Brown
Postaga
<a href="https://www.startupsfortherestofus.com/episodes/episode-670-rely
9/12/2023 • 26 minutes, 37 seconds
Episode 677 | Design Faster and More Effectively With Wireframing
In episode 677, Tracy Osborn interviews Leon Barnard from Balsamiq about wireframing and design. They discuss the book "Wireframing for Everyone" written by Leon and his co-authors from Balsamiq and they emphasize the value of low-fidelity wireframes for founders. They also cover how wireframing can improve ideation and communication processes among teams. To wrap up, they recommend resources for non-designers interested in learning more about wireframing and design.
Episode Sponsor:
Life as a founder can put a strain on even the strongest relationships, but spending dedicated quality time with your better half can help you recharge and refocus. If you’re ready to unwind from the daily startup grind, head over to cratedwithlove.com to level up your next date night. And for listeners of this podcast, you can use code STARTUPS during checkout for an exclusive 15% off your first order.
Topics we cover:
3:29 – TinySeed applications for Fall 2023 are open
5:00 – Leon’s passion for wireframing
8:32 – Designing in low fidelity wireframes
11:03 – Wireframing, ideation, and iteration
16:21 – Communicating design with wireframing
21:22 – Using wireframing to iterate on already existing, high fidelity content
24:35 – Writing about wireframing within the broader context of general design principles
28:16 – Additional resources for non-designers to gain confidence in design
32:36 – Asking questions informs good design
Links from the Show:
MicroConf is leveling up!
Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) | X
Leon Barnard (@leonbarnard) | X
Leon Barnard | LinkedIn
Balsamiq (@balsamiq) | X
Wireframing for Everyone by Michael Angeles, Leon Barnard, and Billy Carlson
Balsamiq Wireframing Academy
Sketching User Experiences by Bill Buxton
Don’t Make Me Think by Steve Krug
UX for Lean Startups by Laura Klein
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
9/5/2023 • 35 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode 676 | Exit Valuations, Choosing Between Ideas, and More Listener Questions
In episode 676, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he answers more listener questions. He answers questions around the inflated valuations in the B2B SaaS market, choosing between ideas, and validating a SaaS idea before building. Rob wraps up evaluating the effectiveness of building a podcast or YouTube following prior to launch.
Topics we cover:
0:56 – TinySeed applications for fall 2023 batch
1:42 – The Future of MicroConf announcement event
2:13 – Why are B2B SaaS valuations so high?
10:43 – Choosing between two software ideas
15:02 – Don’t start a two-sided marketplace
17:04 – Do my “Stair Steps” have to be related?
19:47 – Co-founder equity splits and founder agreements
24:56 – Idea validation techniques
28:02 – Starting a podcast to building an audience
Links from the Show:
The SaaS Playbook
TinySeed
Future of MicroConf
The UpFlip Podcast
27. How to Build a Thriving Software Company (From Scratch)
Quiet Light, Empire Flippers, FE international
Castos Productions
Nolo, Rocket Lawyer, Lexgo
Slicing Pie
Episode 671 | Working on What Matters, Left-handed Threads, and Being Lucky (A Rob Solo Adventure)
The Stair Step Method of Bootstrapping
Traction by Gino Wickman
Hacking Growth by Sean Brown, Morgan, Ellis
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | <a rel="noreferrer noopener" href="https://podcasts.google.com/feed/aHR0cHM6Ly9mZWVkcy5jYXN0b3MuY2
8/29/2023 • 33 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode 675 | Storytelling as a Sales Superpower (Book Recommendation)
In episode 675, Rob Walling interviews Stephen Steers, author of "Superpower Storytelling." They discuss Stephen’s experience in selling and teaching startups how to sell better. They cover Stephen’s storytelling “AREA” framework and the concept of the problem stack. They also talk about when founders should consider delegating sales, the importance of documenting successful sales processes, and using humor in the sales process.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:36 – Start Small, Stay Small
3:21 – Stephen’s book, Superpower Storytelling, and how to tell the story of you and your company
4:30 – Why is storytelling important for startups
7:47 – A valuable background in sales consulting
10:35 – The AREA mental framework
13:21 – The “problem stack”
18:42 – When to outsource sales in your organization
22:37 – The four reasons that businesses buy, consultative selling
28:01 – Using humor to your advantage when selling or as a founder
Links from the Show:
Stephen Steers | LinkedIn
Steers Sales Consulting
Superpower Storytelling by Stephen Steers
Start Small, Stay Small by Rob Walling
Made to Stick by Chip Heath & Dan Heath
Taki Moore (@takimoore) | Twitter
Scott Sambucci (@scottsambucci) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: <a rel="noreferrer noopener" href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/startups-for
8/22/2023 • 34 minutes, 3 seconds
Episode 674 | SparkToro Pays Back Investors, When to Raise Funding, and X.com (Hot Take Tuesday)
In episode 674, join Rob Walling, Einar Vollset, and Tracy Osborn for Hot Take Tuesday, where they analyze and discuss some of the latest news. They talk about Elon rebranding Twitter to X and the emergence of Instagram's Threads. They also cover the pros and cons of taking VC and SparkToro's unique funding model and paying back investors.
Topics we cover:
2:49 – Twitter is now X
5:53 – Does the rebranding make sense?
12:15 – Instagram launches Threads
19:18 – SparkToro pays back investors
26:04 – Planning ahead for the payback
28:53 – “Don’t take VC funding”
35:11 – “We Raised a Bunch of Money”
Links from the Show:
Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) | Twitter
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | Twitter
The SaaS Playbook
TinySeed
Twitter is being rebranded as X
Introducing Threads: A New Way to Share with Text
Rand Fishkin (@randfish ) |Twitter
Casey Henry (@caseyhen) |Twitter
SparkToro
Postpone
SparkToro Year 3 Retrospective: Investor Payback, Systemic Challenges, and V2 on the Way
Lost and Founder by Rand Fishkin
Fly.io
We Raised A Bunch Of Money
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
8/15/2023 • 43 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 673 | Lifetime Plans vs Subscriptions, Testing an Idea With a Landing Page, and More Listener Questions
In episode 673, Rob Walling chats with Ruben Gamez, the founder of SignWell, as they answer listener questions. They cover topics related to pricing models for SaaS products, marketing strategies for new products, the concept of copycat apps, and the challenges of balancing customer requests with product development. Additionally, they address a question about choosing between working at a startup or a big tech company.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:06 – Lifetime value pricing vs. monthly recurring revenue
11:33 – Pay-as-you-go as an alternative to lifetime or SaaS pricing
14:30 – Testing the market with a landing page
22:16 – Getting feedback from landing page signups
25:11 – Marketing strategies for SaaS
32:53 – Building copycat apps
38:51 – Startup roles vs. roles in a big tech company as a software engineer
43:33 – Balancing customer needs with our strategic roadmap
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Sponsorships
The SaaS Playbook
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | Twitter
SignWell (@SignWellApp) |Twitter
SignWell
Hackers Incorporated, E4 | Lifetime pricing is underrated
AppSumo
Tailwind UI
Loadster
How to Grow Your Self Funded Business Faster – Hiten Shah – MicroConf 2014
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please <a href="https://www.startupsfortherestofus.com/contact" tar
8/8/2023 • 51 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 672 | Bootstrapping, Building, Buying, and Selling SaaS Companies
In episode 672, Rob Walling speaks with Jon Hainstock, M&A advisor at Quiet Light and previously ZoomShift. They discuss Jon’s bootstrapper journey, his exit from ZoomShift, the benefits of buying versus building, and how he helps other founders sell their businesses at Quiet Light. To wrap up, Jon exposes some common pitfalls to avoid when buying businesses.
Topics we cover:
2:17 – Timeline of building and selling ZoomShift
6:07 – Deciding to sell ZoomShift
11:06 – Jumping into a new project immediately after exit
17:16 – Acquiring small assets
19:16 – Picking Quiet Light Brokerage over smaller acquisitions
26:23 – “Broker” vs. “Advisor”
30:26 – What to avoid when buying a business
Links from the Show:
The Exit Event
Jon Hainstock (@jonhainstock) | Twitter
Quiet Light (@quietlightinc) | Twitter
ZoomShift
ChatterDocs.ai
Quiet Light
Finish Big by Bo Burlingham
Acquire.com, formerly MicroAcquire
Rich Dad Poor Dad by Robert T. Kiyosaki
The Quiet Light Podcast
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
8/1/2023 • 41 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 671 | Working on What Matters, Left-handed Threads, and Being Lucky (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 671, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he covers a variety of topics. First, he shares an example of why successful founders move the needle rather than staying in their comfort zone. He shares an anecdote about discovering left-handed threads and how it applies to startups, and wraps up with some thoughts on the role of luck in audience building.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:56 – Moving the needle rather than staying comfortable
11:10 – First time discovering left-handed threads
19:15 – Building an audience doesn’t require luck
Links from the Show:
MicroConf
MicroConf Connect
The SaaS Playbook
Episode 670 | Relying on Luck, Avoiding Burnout, and Bad Player vs. Bad Instrument (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Joel Spolsky (@spolsky) | Twitter
TinySeed
How to Build SaaS from Scratch in 8 Simplified Steps
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
7/25/2023 • 23 minutes, 45 seconds
Episode 670 | Relying on Luck, Avoiding Burnout, and Bad Player vs. Bad Instrument (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 670, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure, where he discusses why, while striking luck in your SaaS journey is great, working hard and building skills is the sustainable way to build businesses for the long haul. He also shares his personal approach to work when burnout is on the horizon and finally an anecdote relating to SaaS marketing approaches.
Topics we cover:
0:41 – RSS feed issues, undesirable startup tasks
2:52 – Two exclusive episodes of Startups For the Rest of Us
3:39 – Success takes hard work, luck, and skill
11:00 – The grind of content creation, burnout on the horizon
21:38 – Bad player or bad instrument?
Links from the Show:
Episode 667 | Increase Your Exit Price by Decoupling Yourself from Your Business with John Warrillow
Castos
Sugarcult – “Stuck in America”
MicroConf YouTube Channel
MicroConf On Air Podcast
Sherry Walling (@sherrywalling) | Twitter
The Entrepreneur’s Guide to Keeping Your Sh*t Together
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
7/18/2023 • 26 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 669 | 10 Years to Overnight Success: Bootstrapping to a Multi-Million Dollar Exit
In episode 669, Rob Walling chats with Rick Hymanson, founder of detamoov and previously Shugo. They discuss Rick’s exit from Shugo in 2018 in what Rob calls “ten years to overnight success”. Rick recounts an early pivot for the company in finding product market fit, building the business with a day job, the logistics of the exit, and why he’s excited to join TinySeed with detamoov.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:59 – How Rick felt after exiting Shugo
5:10 – Deciding to start detamoov after the exit
7:09 – Creating a Shugo MVP and pivoting
11:15 – Building a SaaS product while working a day job
15:34 – Transitioning to full time and growing Shugo ARR
20:28 – Expanding the product feature set
22:11 – When did you know you had product-market fit?
23:28 – Finding an acquirer and navigating the process
27:38 – Starting and growing datamoov
31:12 – The value of relationship building
34:43 – IP ownership agreements
Links from the Show:
Rick Hymanson | LinkedIn
detamoov
The SaaS Playbook
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Google
7/11/2023 • 36 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 668 | 9 Key Takeaways from MicroConf U.S. 2023 in Denver
In episode 668, Rob Walling and Arvid Kahl share nine key takeaways from MicroConf US 2023 in Denver. They cover topics ranging from founder mental health, shared motivations for bootstrapping, the value of in-person conferences, and the MicroConf experimentation that led to the “Chaos Lunch”.
Topics we cover:
2:04 – MicroConf 2023 in Denver, building back after COVID
9:09 – Founders are sharing an experience of struggles and pivots
11:21 – Why nothing beats being in a room together
14:07 – Discussing mental health in a welcoming environment
17:07 – How experimentation on the MicroConf format led to “Chaos Lunch”
21:03 – Sharing strategies and tactics, Dev Basu’s talk on product marketing
24:28 – What motivations do founders have for running their SaaS businesses
27:27 – Arvid’s workshop encourages discussion of founder mental health
30:22 – MicroConf’s powerful Hallway track
32:45 – Patrick Campbell’s talk on mental frameworks and founder paths
36:47 – Upcoming MicroConf events
40:05 – The not-so-hidden track: Arvid’s Twitter growth and strategy
Links from the Show:
MicroConf US 2024 | Atlanta, GA | April 21 - 23, 2024
MicroConf US Recordings
Arvid Kahl (@arvidkahl) I Twitter
Episode 492 | From Zero to $55k MRR to Exit (in 2 Years) with Feedback Panda
thebootstrappedfounder.com
Lianna Patch (@punchlinecopy) | Twitter
Claire Suellentrop (@ClaireSuellen) | Twitter
Dev Basu (@devbasu) | Twitter
Patrick Campbell (@Patticus) Twitter
John Ndege (@johnndege) | Twitter
Comte Anthony Eden (@aeden) | Twitter
Quiet Light (@quietlightinc) | Twitter
Sherry Walling (@sherrywalling) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | <a rel="noreferrer noopener" href="https://podcasts.google.com/feed/aHR0cHM6Ly9mZWVkcy5jYXN
7/4/2023 • 49 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 667 | Increase Your Exit Price by Decoupling Yourself from Your Business with John Warrillow
In episode 667, Rob Walling speaks with John Warrillow, author of Built to Sell, about validating and launching his second SaaS business, VidGuide. They cover how Standard Operating Procedures can help your business, from leading toward better exits to easing your burden as a founder.
Topics we cover:
2:59 – Why John decided to launch VidGuide
7:23 – Validating and positioning a “scratch-your-own-itch” SaaS idea
13:45 – Considerations for novel software solutions
18:27 – Success stories of others and their SOPs
22:42 – John’s early validation for VidGuide
26:13 – Following April Dunford’s methodology for positioning
Links from the Show:
John Warrillow (@JohnWarrillow) I Twitter
Built To Sell by John Warrillow
The Automatic Customer by John Warrillow
The Art of Selling Your Business by John Warrillow
The ValueBuilder System
Built to Sell Radio
VidGuide
Episode 532 | The Art of Selling Your Business with John Warrillow
Episode 603 | Bootstrapping HotJar to $40M ARR Using D2C Marketing
Episode 492 | From Zero to $55k MRR to Exit (in 2 Years) with Feedback Panda
Ten Year Career by Jodie Cook
MicroConf Refresh Episode 60: How to Craft a Story that Sells with April Dunford
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/27/2023 • 30 minutes, 51 seconds
Episode 666 | Entering a Competitive Market, Books for SaaS Founders, and More Listener Questions with Derrick Reimer
In episode 666, Rob Walling chats with fan favorite Derrick Reimer, the founder of SavvyCal, as they answer listener questions. They cover topics ranging from idea validation in competitive spaces to book recommendations to development strategies for non-technical founders.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:05 – How to validate ideas in competitive markets
7:49 – How to manage stress when growing a small SaaS business
15:48 – Finding a technical co-founder vs. outsourcing development
28:24 – How to decide between doubling down on a current project or starting a new SaaS app
34:15 – Tools for tracking traffic, conversions, and A/B test results
40:21 – Recommended reading for SaaS startups
Links from the Show:
Derrick Reimer (@derrickreimer) I Twitter
SavvyCal
The Mom Test by Rob Fitzpatrick
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | Twitter
Pieter Levels (@levelsio) | Twitter
Danny Postma (@dannypostmaa) | Twitter
Fathom Analytics, Mixpanel, Heap, Segmetrics.io, June
Optimizely, VWO, Hotjar, Crazy Egg
Obviously Awesome by April Dunford
<a href="https://a.co/d/dowrgbt" target="_blank" rel
6/20/2023 • 53 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 665 | How to Find More "Best Fit" Customers for Your SaaS
In episode 665, Rob Walling chats with Georgiana Laudi, who is the co-author of the new book, Forget the Funnel. They dive deep into key concepts from the book, including specific Jobs-to-be-done interview examples and how to apply these insights to your marketing strategy.
They also chat a bit about the process of writing a book.
Topics we cover:
2:37 - Gia and Claire's intentional decision to keep the book under 200 pages
5:28 - What size SaaS companies will get the most value from Claire and Gia’s new book?
9:49 - The customer-led growth framework
11:29 - Why you shouldn’t think in terms of marketing funnels
15:51- Jobs-to-be done interviews
20:27- An approach for founders who are skeptical about customer research and JTBD interviews
25:15- How to use information gathered from customer interviews to inform your marketing strategy
29:47- What was the experience like recording the audiobook?
Links from the Show:
Claire Suellentrop @clairesuellen I Twitter
Georgiana Laudi @ggiiaa) I Twitter
Forget the Funnel: A Customer-Led Approach for Driving Predictable, Recurring Revenue
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/13/2023 • 33 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 664 | The Challenges of Horizontal SaaS, Adding Services to a SaaS, and More Listener Questions
In episode 664, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he answers more listener questions. These questions range from positioning a new SaaS product with many use cases to consumption vs. seat-based pricing and managing your time as a single parent.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:07 - Positioning a new SaaS business with multiple use cases
9:22 - Consumption vs. seat-based pricing
13:00 - When to expand a SaaS business outside of the core problem it solves
19:07 - Building a marketing flywheel for a 2-sided marketplace
22:23- Managing your time as a single parent
Links from the Show:
Obviously Awesome: How to Nail Product Positioning so Customers Get It, Buy It, Love It
Start Small, Stay Small: A Developer’s Guide To Launching a Startup
The SaaS Playbook
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/6/2023 • 34 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 663 | 5 Insights SaaS Founders Should Know About A.I. (Ignore at Your Peril)
In episode 663, Rob Walling and Einar Vollset share five insights SaaS founders should know about the state of AI. They offer a unique perspective by sharing a mental model around the four categories of AI and how to use this to think about the impact on your business.
Topics we cover:
2:08 - Einar’s thoughts on the state of AI
7:11 - Why you shouldn’t ignore AI
9:33 - The 4 categories of AI
18:36 - AI is not a product differentiator
22:01- Should bootstrapped companies try to build their own LLMs?
24:41- Using AI internally in your company
30:03 - Is my business model a ticking time bomb?
Links from the Show:
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) I Twitter
MicroConf Europe
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/30/2023 • 36 minutes, 2 seconds
Episode 662 | Selling for Five Years of Runway, Profit vs. Revenue Multiples, and More Listener Questions (Rob Solo)
In episode 662, join Rob Walling for a solo listening adventure where he talks through the key factors to consider in an acquisition, whether to sell a business for five years of runway and knowing when to move on from a SaaS app you built.
Topics we cover:
1:15 - Switching jobs while bootstrapping
7:36 - Key factors to consider for an acquisition
18:57 - Taking a job as a founding engineer vs. starting a lifestyle business?
23:49 - Selling a business for five years of runway
27:47- Knowing when it is time to move on from a SaaS app you’ve built
Links from the Show:
The Art of Selling Your Business: Winning Strategies & Secret Hacks For Exiting on Top
Deploy Empathy: A Practical Guide to Interviewing Customers
The Mom Test: How to Talk to Customers & Learn If Your Business is a Good Idea When Everyone Is Lying To You
Episode 628 I The 5 P.M. Idea Validation Framework
MicroConf Europe
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/23/2023 • 33 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 661 | Millions in Revenue As a One-Person Software Company
In episode 661, Rob Walling chats with Mike Perham, the founder of Sidekiq, who is a solo founder doing millions in revenue as a one-person business.
If this isn’t unique enough, Sidekiq originally started as an open-source project before he later monetized it by selling features that aren't available in the core product. You'll also hear how it took him ten years to become "an overnight success" because of all the things Mike tried before launching Sidekiq.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:51 - Sidekiq’s unique business model
5:24 - Running a multimillion-dollar software company with no employees
6:41 - How did Mike get here?
8:23 - Mike’s approach to monetizing Sidekiq
12:58- The 10-year overnight success story
14:13 - Did Mike ever have any doubts about this not working?
16:54- Mike’s thoughts around building on top of the Ruby ecosystem
19:26 - Why doesn't Mike hire any employees?
23:31- Mike’s approach to competitors
26:08 - Mike’s response to open-source purists on Hacker News
Links from the Show:
Mike Perham (@getajobmike) I Twitter
Sidekiq
Code Code Ship: Mike Perham
Hacker News Discussion about Sidekiq
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/16/2023 • 29 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 660 | Make Ever-Increasing and Manageably-Sized Mistakes (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 660, join Rob Walling for another solo listening adventure where he talks about the tradeoffs of hiring a team vs. contractors, when to raise funding as a bootstrapper, and the importance of knowing what you are bad at.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:57 - Hiring full-time employees vs. contractors
6:12 - The danger of thinking your customers are just like you
11:19 - Buying souvenirs
14:34 - Raising funding if you are a bootstrapper
18:18- On career progression
21:51 - The importance of knowing what you are bad at
Links from the Show:
Comic Lab
MicroConf Mastermind Matching
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/9/2023 • 24 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode 659 | Indie Hackers' Newfound Independence + The SaaS Playbook with Courtland and Channing
In episode 659, Rob Walling speaks with Courtland Allen and Channing Allen, the co-founders of Indie Hackers, to talk about their newfound independence since they are no longer owned by Stripe.
For the first half of the episode, they turn the tables and interview Rob about his new book, The SaaS Playbook.
They also share a bunch of theories about entrepreneurship and investing.
Topics we cover:
4:46 - About Rob’s new book - The SaaS Playbook
6:47 - Why did Rob hire a writing coach?
12:35 - Rob’s decision to launch a Kickstarter for his book
20:39- Rob’s thought process for what to include in his book
28:31 - Startup positioning
31:07 - Founder mindset
35:51 - Is it possible to find a business idea that both makes money and aligns with the things you enjoy doing?
42:38 - What motivates Rob these days?
48:18 - Courtland and Channing’s approach to going indie again with Indie Hackers
53:46 - Did Courtland and Channing have hesitations about going independent again?
57:44 - What does Rob want to see Courtland and Channing do next?
1:01:07 - Indie hackers investing in other indie hackers
Links from the Show:
Courtland Allen (@csallen) I Twitter
Channing Allen (@channingallen) I Twitter
Indie Hackers
The Personal MBA: Master the Art of Business
The War of Art
Lifting the Veil: The Data Behind Successful Product Launches - Ryan Delk - MicroConf 2014
MicroConf Upcoming Events
MicroConf Mastermind Matching
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/2/2023 • 1 hour, 10 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 658 | As a SaaS Founder, When Should You Care About Sales Tax?
In episode 658, Rob Walling speaks with Geoff Roberts, co-founder of Outseta, about global sales tax compliance for SaaS founders. Geoff wrote a 4,400 article on the topic about when SaaS founders should care about sales tax not only within their own country but globally, along with the pros and cons of various solutions. We also dive into a bit of Geoff’s own story as the cofounder of Outseta.
Topics we cover:
3:01 - Why should SaaS founders care about sales tax?
4:20 - At what revenue level does sales tax become important?
6:28 - Country-specific sales tax obligations
7:50 - The added tax complexities of running a membership platform
9:07 - What is a merchant of record?
14:28 - Why did Geoff write this 4,000-word post on sales tax compliance?
16:05 - The pros and cons of using a third-party merchant of record
17:39 - Alternative solutions where you are your own merchant of record
20:38 - How does a foreign government enforce tax requirements for an American small business?
21:48 - Mitigating sales tax risks if you take on funding or sell the company
23:34 - About Outseta
24:27 - The impact of the pandemic on Outseta
25:20 - The challenge of speaking to two very different audiences
Links from the Show:
Geoff Roberts @GeoffTRoberts I Twitter
Outseta
Global Sales Tax Compliance and Remittance
MicroConf Mastermind Matching
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/25/2023 • 30 minutes, 1 second
Episode 657 | Concierge Onboarding, Building a Great Brand, and More Listener Questions
In episode 657, join Rob Walling as he answers more listener questions. Topics range from concierge onboarding to getting higher engagement rates on cold emails. He also covers how to think about balancing product improvements vs. marketing.
Topics we cover:
1:00 - Concierge onboarding
7:34 - Branding tips for a new business
14:42 - Getting higher engagement rates on cold outreach emails
21:29 - Prioritizing product improvements vs. funnel-building
14:42 - Getting higher engagement rates on cold outreach emails
21:29 - Prioritizing product improvements vs. funnel-building
Links from the Show:
Fascinate, Revised and Updated: How to Make Your Brand Impossible to Resist
TinySeed
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/18/2023 • 27 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 656 | Taste vs. Shipping + Being First vs. Being the Best (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 656, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure, where he revisits a few topics from earlier episodes. These topics range from balancing having taste while shipping consistently to the only two keys to being remembered for something.
Topics we cover:
1:39 - What founders need to know about the Section 174 tax change
5:03 - Balancing developing taste with shipping
10:47 - If you want to be remembered for something, you either have to be the first or the best.
17:13 - Lifestyle bootstrapper vs. ambitious bootstrapper vs. the billion-dollar entrepreneur and why you need to get clear on the path you aspire to take.
Links from the Show:
Small Software Business Coalition Letter To Congress
Episode 652 I Mixing No-code with Code, Developer Superpowers, $5k Angel Check, and More Listener Questions
Obviously Awesome: How to Nail Product Positioning so Customers Get It, Buy It, Love It
The SaaS Playbook
TinySeed
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/11/2023 • 25 minutes, 23 seconds
Startups For The Rest Of Us Podcast Trailer
It’s possible to build a multimillion dollar startup without venture capital. I know this, because I’ve done it myself and I’ve watched hundreds of other founders do the same. This podcast is all about the strategies and frameworks that can get you there too.
Welcome to Startups For the Rest of Us, a podcast that’s focused on helping developers, designers and entrepreneurs build life-changing businesses without begging venture capitalists for money. You’re in the right place if you’re a bootstrapped or mostly bootstrapped SaaS founder who wants to build and grow your company faster.
I’m your host, Rob Walling. I’m a serial entrepreneur with multiple exits, I’ve written 4 books about starting companies, and I’ve invested in more than 150 startups.
For over 13 years, I’ve shown up here every Tuesday sharing my experience starting, growing, and mentoring startups, so you can avoid the mistakes others have made.
When I first got started, I realized that most of the startup advice I could find online was aimed at companies focused on billion dollar exits, or founders looking to build a slide deck instead of a real business. I was constantly frustrated that no one was providing stories, strategies and tactics for founders who just want to build a real product for real customers who pay them real money.
If you want to launch a startup, or grow your SaaS startup so it supports you full-time, OR you’re already making six or seven figures and want to grow your business faster, the stories, strategies, and tactics on this show will help you do just that.
Go ahead and subscribe and I’ll be in your ears next Tuesday.
Links from the Pod:
Rob Walling | Twitter
Startups For the Rest of Us | Twitter
MicroConf YouTube Channel
4/6/2023 • 1 minute, 23 seconds
Episode 655 | Seat-Based Pricing, Can Churn Be Too Low? and More Listener Questions (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 655, Rob Walling answers listener questions on enterprise pricing frameworks, validating a business idea, and if it is possible for your churn rate to be too low.
Topics we cover:
2:17 - How to avoid login abuse on individual plans
8:12 - How to validate a business idea before committing to it
15:26 - Enterprise pricing frameworks
19:34 - What Rob learned in the early days as a consultant and building early products pre-Drip
26:22 - Finding role fit in a SaaS
32:21 - Is it possible to have a churn rate that is too low?
33:41 - How much should you pay yourself vs. investing back into the business?
Links from the Show:
The SaaS Playbook
Validate Your SaaS Idea Fast
State of Independent SaaS Report
The Stair Step Method of Bootstrapping
Episode 628 I The 5 P.M. Idea Validation Framework
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/4/2023 • 38 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 654 | Shipping Every Day for 10 Years with Tom Merritt
In episode 654, Rob Walling chats with Tom Merritt, who is the host of multiple shows, including Daily Tech News, Know A Little More, Sword & Laser, Cordkillers, and more. Tom has more podcasts than anyone I know, and this episode will be a little different since Tom is not a SaaS founder or someone who wrote a book for founders.
Instead, you’ll learn about the systems, processes, and discipline that Tom has set up so that he can be such a prolific creator. You’ll also learn more about his innate ability to summarize complex situations and then talk about both sides in a fair and balanced way.
Topics we cover:
3:13 - Tom’s decision to go into business for himself in 2013
7:10 - Being an early adopter of Patreon
9:29 - Dealing with the emotional aspect in the early days
10:40 - The hardest parts of launching a daily show in the early days
13:01 - Tom’s approach to dealing with public criticism
19:07 - Tom’s process for shipping new content every day for 10 years
24:00 - Has Tom missed a day for recording The Daily Tech News Show in 10 years?
25:01 - Tom’s ability to see and communicate both sides of a story
28:22 - Is Tom using AI in his workflow?
34:10 - The Secret Hidden Track
Links from the Show:
Tom Merritt I Twitter
Tommerritt.com
Daily Tech News Show
ElevenLabs
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/28/2023 • 46 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode 653 | Armageddon Beer, Developing Taste, and What if I Succeed? (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 653, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he talks through three topics, including the story of an Armageddon beer, developing taste, and an important question that all entrepreneurs should ask themselves.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:41 - The Armageddon beer story
10:49 - Developing taste as an entrepreneur
18:25 - What if I succeed?
Links from the Show:
MicroConf U.S.
MicroConf Remote 6.0
The Gap by Ira Glass
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/21/2023 • 24 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 652 | Mixing No-code with Code, Developer Superpowers, $5k Angel Check, and More Listener Questions
In episode 652, Rob Walling answers more listener questions with Derrick Reimer, the founder of SavvyCal. They cover topics from the most important superpower for developers to the best resources for learning how to code and should you ever mix no-code with code.
Topics we cover:
2:03 - The most important superpower for developers
11:39 - Combining no-code with code
20:31- Should you take a $5k angel investment?
25:30 - How to do outreach for initial idea validation calls
29:09 - How should bootstrapped founders handle the Section 174 changes
33:50 - Best resources to learn how to code
Links from the Show:
Derrick Reimer (@derrickreimer) I Twitter
Derrickreimer.com
SavvyCal
Episode 642 I The Pros and Cons of Building a No-Code MVP
MicroConf Remote 6.0
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/14/2023 • 42 minutes, 51 seconds
Episode 651 | From Side Hustle to Full-time & Profitable (with Mike Taber)
In episode 651, Rob Walling catches up with fan favorite Mike Taber, who co-hosted the first 448 episodes of Startups For the Rest of Us. The last time he was on the podcast, Bluetick was still a side hustle. Now, 15 months later, he shares that the app is now profitable, supporting him full-time, and gives an update on some key parts of his entrepreneurial journey.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:34 - An update on Bluetick
6:26 - Is Bluetick a profitable business?
8:59 - Why Mike decided to pivot his company to supporting agencies
13:34 - Setting up Bluetick to scale from 1x to 500x volume
15:33 - Is Mike doing much marketing these days?
19:12 - Mike’s celebration moment in the past 15 months
20:40 - When Mike realized he had product-market fit
23:54 - How Mike thinks about implementing new features
24:55 - Mike’s low point in the past 15 months
26:27 - What changed that allowed Mike’s business to grow so dramatically over the past year?
32:50 - Is Mike planning to update his marketing to position the product to agencies?
Links from the Show:
Mike Taber (@SingleFounder) I Twitter
Bluetick.io
MicroConf US
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/7/2023 • 36 minutes, 29 seconds
Episode 650 | Building vs. Buying a SaaS, Day Job Constraints, and More Listener Questions
In episode 650, Rob Walling answers more listener questions. We cover topics like how to get more customers while working a full-time job, talking to users when there is a language barrier, and whether to buy vs. build a SaaS product.
Topics we cover:
1:59 - Buying a small SaaS for $10,000 vs. getting financing and buying a SaaS for 6-figures
8:00 - How to get more customers while working full-time
13:33 - Can you hire someone to find an established SaaS business for you to buy?
16:40 - Diverse entrepreneurship podcast recommendations
20:08 - Talking to users when there is a language barrier
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Remote 6.0
SaaS Playbook
Zen Founder
Software Social
Indie Hackers
In Demand: How To Grow Your SaaS to $100k MRR
They Got Acquired
Afford Anything
Deploy Empathy: A Practical Guide To Interviewing Customers
The Jobs-To-Be-Done Handbook
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/28/2023 • 25 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode 649 | Learning to Sell SaaS as a Founder (Book Recommendation)
In episode 649, Rob Walling chats with Pete Kazanjy about his book Founding Sales, which is designed to help SaaS founders learn how to sell as well as how to hire and scale sales. We cover a lot, including objection handling, how to ask for the sale, and mindset shifts you need to make when learning how to sell.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
3:53 - Overview of Founding Sales
7:54 - Growing TalentBin to $6M ARR
10:28 - What Pete is working on today with Atrium
12:28 - Mindset changes when doing sales for the first time
19:26 - Speed vs. production value for sales materials
22:46 - Handling objections
26:50 - Asking for the sale
31:03 - Relentless execution
32:15 - What sets good sales reps apart from those that struggle?
Links from the Show:
Pete Kazanjy (@Kazanjy) I Twitter
Atrium
Founding Sales
Modern Sales Pros
Predictable Revenue: Turn Your Business Into A Sales Machine With The $100 Million Best Practices of Salesforce.com
The Lean Startup
The Startup Owner’s Manual
ElevenLabs Prime Voice AI
<a href="https:/
2/21/2023 • 39 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 648 | Competing with a Non-Profit, Driving Traffic to A Landing Page, and More Listener Questions
In episode 648, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he answers a bunch of listener questions. Some topics covered include competing against a nonprofit, validating step 1 app marketplace businesses, and driving traffic to idea validation landing pages.
Topics we cover:
2:02 - Competing against a nonprofit as a startup
4:11 - The trend of bigger companies building more projects in adjacent verticals
8:03 - Incorporating as a Delaware C Corp
9:57 - Bootstrapping a spinoff startup from a dev agency
14:27 - How to go to market when solving a latent pain
19:09 - How to validate step 1 app marketplace businesses
22:19 - Driving traffic to an idea validation landing page
Links from the Show:
SaaS Playbook
The Elephant in the Room: The Myth of Exponential Hypergrowth
Episode 442 I Corporate Structures and How The Choice You Make Now Can Impact You Years Down The Line
Stripe Atlas
How to Get Your First Hundred Customers for Your SaaS Product
Traction: How Any Startup Can Achieve Explosive Customer Growth
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
In this bonus episode, we are playing back the audio from yesterday’s TinySeed Application Q&A livestream.
The TinySeed team (Rob Walling, Tracy Osborn, and Alex McQuade) answers questions from the audience about the application process.
TinySeed is a year-long, remote accelerator designed for early-stage SaaS founders. Our program is designed to help founders with a revenue-generating SaaS optimize product-market fit and grow faster.
Spring 2023 applications are open until from February 6th to February 19th, 2023.
For more information about the program and application process, check out https://tinyseed.com/program
Links from the Pod
Watch this Q&A on YouTube
Apply for TinySeed
Tracy Osborn I Twitter
Alex McQuade I Twitter
2/9/2023 • 58 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 647 | Equipping Sales & Support With Critical Product Knowledge As You Grow
In episode 647, Rob Walling chats with Whitney Deterding about product marketing and how to equip sales, support, and your entire team with critical product knowledge as you grow. We dive into how to communicate all aspects of your product, from individual features to benefits and use cases.
When you're one or two people, you're doing all of this as a founder, but the moment you have three, four, or more people on your team, you have to figure out a way to communicate how the product is changing effectively. Otherwise, your prospects, sales, and support won't know that.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
4:08 - What is product marketing?
8:56 - How do you implement cross team knowledge sharing?
14:54 - When should you start writing product or launch briefs?
16:35 - Training new sales and customer success people
23:05 - How to equip your salespeople
31:18 - Product positioning
35:13 - How to navigate positioning changes over times
Links from the Show:
Whitney Deterding (@WhitDeterding) I Twitter
Coschedule
Guru
TinySeed
TinySeed Applications Q&A on February 8
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/7/2023 • 40 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode 646.5 | Bonus Episode: A Big Change to MicroConf
In this bonus episode of Startups For the Rest of Us, we realized that we have never talked about the refocusing of MicroConf US and MicroConf Europe and growing our extended hallway track to focus on helping founders build more connections.
Since we started the event in 2011, we've done 35 of them now. The feedback we've always gotten is that the hallway track is the best part of MicroConf, and the speakers are an excuse to get us all in a room so that we can meet one another and build those relationships.
After Covid hit, we decided to take a chance and adjust our traditional format. We cut down the number of speakers and focused more on additional ways to grow the hallway track. In MicroConf US - Denver - this April, we’re at 5 speakers. All the rest of the time is spent doing activities and connecting with other founders, including through offsite adventures, roundtables, workshops, etc.
Finally, we’ve also introduced Founder by Founder, which is like speed networking. We set a seven-minute timer and encouraged everyone to talk to someone they don't know and introduce themselves.
Whether it's at the workshops, the offsite adventures, or Founder by Founder, we've found getting out of your bubble and connecting with other founders has been an extremely valuable change and a shift to the way that the MicroConf in-person events happen.
Head over to Microconf.com/events to see all of our events happening this year.
2/2/2023 • 5 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 646 | Building a Recurring, Annual Price Increase Into Your SaaS
In episode 646, Rob Walling catches up with James Kennedy, the founder of ProcurementExpress, about James’s unconventional approach to price increases. Every year, James does an annual price increase across the board. He talks about how he communicates it to both leads and customers, the pros and cons of this approach, and why it is been a net positive for the business.
Topics we cover:
2:03 - About ProcurementExpress
4:41 - How big is the ProcurementExpress team?
7:43 - Why did James change the company name?
9:48 - What led James to settle on an 8% annual price increase for all customers
15:02 - Communicating the annual price increase to new customers
17:01- How James uses these annual price increases to close more deals
17:36 - When you shouldn’t do annual price increases
23:04 - SaaS buying patterns that James sees
24:00 - The best subject line that James has ever written
Links from the Show:
James Kennedy (@JamesKennedy) I Twitter
ProcurementExpress
TinySeed
Designing the Ideal Bootstrapped Business with Jason Cohen
How to Stop Giving Demos & Build a Sales Factory Instead – James Kennedy – MicroConf Growth 2017
How We Reduced Churn by 25% and How You Could Do It Too – James Kennedy – MicroConf Europe 2019
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/31/2023 • 26 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 645.5 | Bonus Episode: Mastermind Matching Applications Are Open
Mastermind Matching applications are now open.
Whether you are in the process of validating your SaaS idea and looking for product-market fit to finding a scalable marketing channel, or maybe you are looking for an extra dose of accountability and support as you grow the company, joining a mastermind can help.
With hundreds of successful matches under our belt, we have brought together founders from all walks of life, from over 50 countries across 20 time zones, with a collective $150M+ in ARR.
To do this, we focus on a number of key data points to get a feel for each entrepreneur’s experience level, expectations, work and personality styles, and other key criteria that allow us to make informed matches, including:
Location
Time zone
Language
Experience Level
Current Revenue Level
Goals
Skill Set
Industry served
Whether or not this is your first business
If you already have 1 or more established businesses (like an agency) and building a SaaS as a 2nd business, etc.
We've also made some big updates to the content in our mastermind program, including adding a series of 3 mentor sessions to tackle topics and challenges you are likely to experience based on where you are currently at with your business. These mentor sessions range from how to structure and get the most value out of your mastermind to mastering customer interviews, building a marketing flywheel, and hiring and onboarding your first few employees.
For those of you who sign up for a mastermind and are doing more than $500k in ARR, you'll be invited to attend three virtual office hours with Rob Walling, Co-Founder of TinySeed + MicroConf & Einar Vollset, Co-Founder of TinySeed.
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Masterminds
1/26/2023 • 6 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 645 | Anti-Bro, Nuanced Thinking, and Being Good vs. Being Great (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 645, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he covers whether bootstrapping is the anti-bro movement, the difference between working with someone good vs. someone great, and the rise of outrage culture on social media and how that doesn’t leave much room for nuanced thinking.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
3:28 - The anti-bro startup movement
8:58 - Outrage culture on social media
12:49 - Declining a $9M acquisition at 18
16:14 - What startup founders can learn from outlier performers
22:23- The difference between being good vs. being great
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Masterminds
I Learned 227 Beatles Bass Lines And Discovered This…
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/24/2023 • 24 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode 644 | Buying Back Your Time with Dan Martell
In episode 644, Rob Walling chats with Dan Martell about founder productivity, delegating, and the difference between being effective and efficient. Dan also shares the key frameworks from his first book, Buy Back Your Time, which was released this week.
Topics we cover:
2:40 - Dan’s process for writing his first book
7:56 - The Buyback Principle
12:31 - Hiring and delegating to an assistant
18:02 - The Buyback Loop: Audit, Transfer, and Fill
25:19 - Why no one does it right, and I can’t afford to hire are limiting beliefs
30:53 - 1-3-1 hack
Links from the Show:
Dan Martell @DanMartell) I Twitter
Buy Back Your Time: Get Unstuck, Reclaim Your Freedom, and Build Your Empire
The SaaS Playbook
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/17/2023 • 36 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 643 | Feature Flags, Impostor Syndrome, and More Listener Questions with Derrick Reimer
In episode 643, Rob Walling chats with fan favorite Derrick Reimer, the founder of SavvyCal, as they answer listener questions. They cover topics ranging from SaaS feature flags to communicating product needs to a technical founder and combating imposter syndrome.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:17 - How to think about feature flags for different pricing tiers
10:31 - How to communicate product needs to a technical cofounder
22:03 - When to put your main SaaS on the backburner
28:13 - Combating developer imposter syndrome
Links from the Show:
Derrick Reimer (@derrickreimer) I Twitter
SavvyCal
MicroConf US
The Stair Step Method to Bootstrapping
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/10/2023 • 41 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 642 | The Pros and Cons of Building a No-Code MVP
In episode 642, Rob Walling chats with Tara Reed, who is the founder of Apps Without Code. We talk about her journey getting into no-code, bootstrapping Apps Without Code to $5M ARR, and the decision she made last year to throttle growth to become more profitable. In our conversation, we also cover some of the pros and cons of no-code tools, along with some entrepreneurial mindset shifts that new entrepreneurs need to make.
Topics we cover:
1:46 - How Tara came up with the idea for Apps Without Code
3:56 - Why Tara deliberately scaled the business back from $5M to $3M in ARR
5:35 - Tara’s approach to building the Apps Without Code Team
6:04 - Two ways that Apps Without Code makes money
10:50 - The biggest no-code limitations today
16:29 - Using no-code tools to build MVPs and internal apps
19:07 - Tara’s preferred no-code platform
20:24 - The biggest positives of building with no-code tools
22:40 - The biggest drawbacks of building with no-code tools
26:56 - 3 entrepreneurial mindset shifts that new founders need to make
Links from the Show:
Tara Reed (@tarareed_) I Twitter
Apps without Code
MicroConf 2023 Accountability Challenge
MicroConf Connect
State of Independent SaaS Report
Glide
Episode 14 I Overcoming Fear
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/3/2023 • 37 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 641 | Dealing with High Churn, Rolling Out an MVP, and More Listener Questions
In episode 641, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure as he answers more listener questions. Topics covered range from dealing with high churn when your tool is project-based, what product feedback to listen to in the early days, and when to hire project-level thinkers vs. task-level thinkers.
Topics we cover:
3:18 - Dealing with high churn when your tool is project-based
8:38 - Going upmarket
9:42 - Who to listen to in the early days to improve your product
15:47 - Should I worry about people copying my business idea?
24:26 - Should I join MicroConf Connect if I’m still in the idea validation phase?
25:54 - Hiring project-level thinkers vs. task-level workers
Links from the Show:
The SaaS Playbook
MicroConf 2023 Accountability Challenge
MicroConf Connect
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/27/2022 • 31 minutes, 27 seconds
Episode 640 | Hot Take Tuesday: Recession and Bootstrappers, ChatGPT, Twitter Drama
In episode 640, join Rob Walling, Einar Vollset, and Tracy Osborn for Hot Take Tuesday, where they analyze and discuss some of the latest news. We dig into ChatGPT, the new tool everyone is talking about from OpenAI. We also discuss Elon Musk acquiring Twitter and the drama around this entire endeavor and whether or not the U.S. is in a recession right now.
Topics we cover:
2:06 - ChatGPT
14:29 - Is there a path to bootstrap an AI startup?
18:59 - Is the U.S. in a recession right now?
29:37 - Elon Musk acquiring Twitter and the drama around his early moves
Links from the Show:
Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) I Twitter
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) I Twitter
ChatGPT
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/20/2022 • 44 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 639 | The Secret Sauce to Building Happy, Motivated Teams
In episode 639, Rob Walling chats with Andrew Berkowitz, the co-founder and CEO of Suggestion Ox, about the secret sauce to building happy, high-performing teams and how we as founders need to unlearn some of the strict policies that have been in place for hundreds of years.
Suggestion Ox is a feedback platform that helps HR teams build candid communication between leadership and employees. And before that, Andrew co-founded a sports management platform that was acquired in 2021.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:10 - Why trust is the key ingredient when building high-performing teams
6:56 - Flexible vacation policies
9:17 - Flexible work hours
15:08 - The link between remote work and hiring and retaining great employees
18:14 - Using transparency to build trust with your team
19:43 - How transparent should you be with your team for temporary issues?
21:55 - Does this approach to trust and transparency work at scale?
25:57 - Getting better at giving constructive feedback as a manager
28:20 - Is it possible to hire the best people at scale?
32:08 - Andrew’s approach to dealing with bad apples or people who slack off
36:41 - Building a company culture where employees feel safe to give candid feedback
Links from the Show:
Andrew Berkowitz I Twitter
Suggestion Ox
12/13/2022 • 38 minutes, 2 seconds
Episode 638 | How to Generate Startup Ideas (Plus 8 Ideas You Can Steal)
In episode 638, Rob Walling chats with Justin Vincent about how to generate startup ideas. They share 8 startup ideas in this episode along with Justin’s approach for coming up with thousands of startup ideas.
Topics we cover:
1:58 - Coming up with SaaS ideas
3:51 - Transcription for team meetings
11:42 - Online time capsule
15:41 - Pest control using drones
20:29 - Prerecorded live interviews
25:06 - Special diet builder
26:30 - AI-casting director
29:53 - Cash burn alert for VC
31:47 - database modeling tool
Links from the Show:
Justin Vincent (@justinvincent) I Twitter
Nugget.one
Techzing
Episode 526 I Launching, learning and teaching with Justin Vincent
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/6/2022 • 38 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode 637 | B2B vs. B2C, Hiring for Sales, and Bootstrapping a 2-Sided Marketplace
In episode 637, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure as he answers a handful of listener questions. Topics covered range from hiring your first salesperson and acquiring a web app to dealing with the fear of having your idea copied and why bootstrapping a two-sided marketplace is usually a bad idea.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
1:14 - You either die a consumer startup hero, or you live long enough to see yourself become a B2B SaaS founder.
2:40 - Hiring your first salesperson
9:36 - Bootstrapping a talent marketplace
15:10 - Acquiring a web app
19:40 - Getting over your fear of being copied when doing idea validation interviews
Links from the Show:
Daniel Nguyen (@daniel_nguyenx)’s tweet
The Mom Test
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/29/2022 • 23 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 636 | A Customer-Led Approach to Driving More Recurring Revenue
In episode 636, Rob Walling chats with Claire Suellentrop about the new book she co-wrote with her co-founder, Georgiana Laudi. The book is called Forget the Funnel: A Customer-Led Approach to Driving Predictable Recurring Revenue. Gia and Claire have run a consulting firm for the past several years where they are working with startups and SaaS companies to help them learn more about their customers in order to drive more revenue. And this book is a distillation of their learnings.
Topics we cover:
1:09 - Why did Claire name their new book, Forget the Funnel?
2:36 - A three-step approach for unlocking customer-led growth
3:09 - A framework for getting inside your customers’ heads
14:01 - How to learn from future customers
20:21 - Applying and operationalizing all your customer insights
Links from the Show:
Claire Suellentrop (@ClaireSuellen) I Twitter
Georgiana Laudi (@ggiiaa) I Twitter
Forget The Funnel: a Customer-Led Approach to Driving Predictable, Recurring Revenue
The Jobs-to-be-Done Handbook: Practical techniques for improving your application of Jobs-to-be-Done
Deploy Empathy: A practical guide to interviewing customers
Obviously Awesome: How to Nail Product Positioning so Customers Get It, Buy It, Love It
Episode 537 | On Launching, Funding, and Growth with Serial SaaS Founder Rand Fishkin
Sparktoro
MicroConf Growth
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/22/2022 • 27 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode 635 | Where Are They Now? Catching up with TinySeed Tales' Tony Chan
In episode 635, Rob Walling catches up with Tony Chan, the co-founder of CloudForecast, an AWS cost monitoring tool. Tony shared his victories, challenges, and failures in TinySeed Tales Season 3. It has been over eight months since we recorded the final episode.
In this episode, we reflect and catch up on what’s been happening with Tony and CloudForecast.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
3:03 - Losing one of CloudForecast’s engineers
5:35 - Tony’s approach to hiring engineers
8:31 - Did Tony end up hiring someone to help with content marketing?
17:32 - What is Tony struggling with right now?
21:07 - Managing your founder psychology
25:08 - Tony’s recent conundrum
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
CloudForecast
TinySeed Tales Season 3
MicroConf Local: Austin
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/15/2022 • 32 minutes, 27 seconds
Episode 634 | Naming Your Startup, Tapping Out a Niche, and Licensing Your IP
In episode 634, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure where he answers listener questions on topics ranging from naming your startup to initial aha moments and how to know if you have tapped out a specific niche.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:38 - Naming your startup
6:02 - How to know if you tapped out a specific niche?
13:21 - Did you have an initial aha moment when you felt that this was the winning idea to start up?
22:25 - How would you value your time if you have a client that is gonna be competing in the same space?
Links from the Show:
MicroConf Europe
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/8/2022 • 31 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 633 | Building SaaS Plus a Two-Sided Marketplace
In episode 633, Rob Walling chats with Matt Wensing, the founder of Summit. Matt is no stranger on the podcast. And we talk about Matt's decision to change Summit's brand positioning and the far-reaching impact on his business.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:24 - Matt’s decision to change Summit’s positioning
15:22 - Redesigning Summit’s website
22:39 - The dangers of scaling up before you have product-market fit
24:43 - The response to Summit’s relaunch
29:33 - How Summit is evolving into a 2-sided marketplace
Links from the Show:
Matt Wensing (@MattWensing) I Twitter
Summit
MicroConf Remote
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/1/2022 • 34 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 632 | Hot Take Tuesday: Figma Exit, Side Project Distraction, No Code Dogma
In episode 632, join Rob Walling and Einar Vollset for Hot Take Tuesday, where they analyze and discuss some of the latest news. Some topics covered include the Figma exit, side project distractions, no-code apps, and more.
Episode Sponsor:
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io/startups
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io/ helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io/, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:35 - Adobe acquires Figma
8:20 - Growing one product to $20k MRR vs. launching a bunch of side projects
18:43 - Apple’s anti-ad tracking crackdown
25:58 - Building no-code apps
31:12 - Watching movies at 1.5x speed
Links from the Show:
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) I Twitter
MicroConf Remote
Adobe snaps up Figma for $20 billion
Pierre de Wulf’s tweet
Apple’s ad business set to boom on the back of its own anti-tracking crackdown
Hana’s tweet
Ruben’s tweet
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/25/2022 • 37 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 631 | Re-writing Your Codebase, Stair Stepping, and Difficult Founder Decisions
In episode 631, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure as he answers listener questions on topics ranging from when to rewrite your codebase to founder salaries and balancing your founder vs. developer mindset.
Episode Sponsor
Find your perfect developer or a team at Lemon.io
The competition for incredible engineers and developers has never been more fierce. Lemon.io helps you cut through the noise and find great talent through its network of engineers in Europe and Latin America.
They take care of the vetting, interviewing, and testing of candidates to make sure that you are working with someone who can hit the ground running.
When it comes to hiring, the time it takes to write your job description, list the position, review resumes, schedule interviews, and make an offer can take weeks, if not months. With Lemon.io, you can cut down on a lot of that time by tapping into their wide network of developers who can get started in as early as a week.
And for subscribers of Startups For the Rest of Us, you can get 15% off your first 4 week contract with a developer by visiting lemon.io/startups
Topics we cover:
2:32 - Is there any validity that rewriting our code and changing our tech stack will get us to a higher multiple at a future exit?
8:08 - Founder salaries
12:16 - Using the stair step approach to create a course
15:20 - Can you sell a Zapier-type connection between several products as an early MVP for your target market?
20:06 - Founder mindset vs. developer mindset
Links from the Show:
Episode 622 I Making Hard Product Decisions & Growth vs. Profitability with Derrick Reimer
The Stair Step Approach to Bootstrapping
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/18/2022 • 28 minutes, 11 seconds
Episode 630 | Approaching $1M ARR as a Niche SaaS Founder
In episode 630, Rob Walling chats with Jonathan Weinberg, who is the founder of Builder Prime, a CRM software for home improvement contractors. We chat about how he came up with the idea for Builder Prime, getting early traction, and finding product-market fit.
Topics we cover:
2:46 - Getting Builder Prime to almost $1M ARR
3:32 - Deciding who to hire next
4:40 - How did Jonathan come up with the idea for Builder Prime?
8:29 - Jonathan's decision to quit his day job and work on Builder Prime before it made any money
10:55 - The unique steps that Jonathan took to get early traction
17:05 - When did Jonathan realize he had product-market fit?
24:04 - Jonathan’s hockey stick growth moment
28:31 - What’s next for Jonathan?
Links from the Show:
Jonathan Weinberg @Jonathan_codes) I Twitter
Builder Prime
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
In the final episode of TinySeed Tales Season 3, Rob Walling checks in with Tony Chan of CloudForecast. They reflect on some of the most prominent challenges and milestones that the business has faced over the last year.
Topics we cover:
1:31 - Tony reflects on attending his first MicroConf Growth in Minneapolis
3:30 - An update on how CloudForecast’s content marketing efforts are going
7:59 - Getting an article featured at the top of Reddit
11:16 - An update on how their new senior engineer is doing
16:18 - Why Tony prefers to hire full-time employees
18:26 - An update on CloudForecast’s sales pipeline
20:50 - Tony reflects on the challenges of figuring out where to invest time and capital
24:30 - The importance of getting low-level tasks off your plate
28:36 - What is Tony least looking forward to in the next year?
30:38 - What is Tony most looking forward to in the next year?
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
CloudForecast
Cost of living the cloud life: Fossil fuel consumption as a service
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/6/2022 • 32 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode 628 | The 5 P.M. Idea Validation Framework
In episode 628, join Rob Walling on a solo adventure where he dives into his newest framework. The 5 P.M. Idea Validation Framework is a helpful way to evaluate different startup ideas through a set of criteria to gauge the size of the opportunity.
Want to download the PDF version the the 5 p.M. Idea Evaluation Framework? Join the Startups For The Rest Us Mailing List, and we'll send you the link in the first email. Look for the orange email opt-in widget on the page.
Topics we cover:
3:37 - Why is it called The 5 P.M. Idea Validation Framework?
4:06 - Problem
6:23 - Purchaser
8:17 - Pricing Model
9:00 - Market
12:48 - Product-Founder Fit
13:21 - Pain to validate the product
13:59 - Evaluating two business ideas through Rob’s 5pm framework
Links from the Show:
SaaS Ideas to Build Right Now, Before Someone Else Does
Jon Yongfook's Tweet
MicroConf Connect
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/4/2022 • 29 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 627 | TinySeed Tales s3e5: Meeting the Co-Founder
In the penultimate episode of TinySeed Tales Season 3, Rob Walling checks in with Tony Chan of CloudForecast.
Tony shares some recent big wins, including hiring a senior engineer. We also meet Tony’s cofounder, Francois Lagier, for the first time.
Topics we cover:
1:49 - The story of how Tony and Francois first met
2:14 - Hiring a senior engineer at CloudForecast
8:51 - Tony shares two recent big wins at CloudForecast
14:31 - The paradox of choice that all startup founders face
16:30 - CloudForecast dives into some new content marketing and SEO initiatives
18:35 - What are Tony and Francois looking forward to in the next month?
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
Francois Lagier (@francoislagier) I Twitter
CloudForecast
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/29/2022 • 24 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 626 | Scratching an Itch, Launching a Free SEO Tool, and Growing to $18k MRR
In episode 626, Rob Walling chats with Nick Swan, the founder of SEOTesting.com. SEOTesting helps SEO professionals and agencies automate the reporting of page updates and changes. Nick originally launched it as a free tool under a different name.
In this episode, we cover when Nick decided to charge for it, renaming the tool, rewriting the codebase, and the journey to growing to $18,000 MRR.
Topics we cover:
3:17 - Growing SEOTesting.com to $18,000 MRR
4:53 - What kinds of businesses use SEOTesting.com?
8:11 - The decision to build SEOTesting
12:33 - Launching SEOTesting as a free tool
15:39 - When Nick started to charge for SEOTesting?
18:16 - Nick’s initial pricing strategy and rollout
27:06 - Reflecting on the initial launch
29:49 - Nick’s thought process for pivoting and changing the company name
34:45 - Reaching product-market fit
36:01 - Nick’s decision to bring on a co-founder a few years in
39:32 - Prioritizing marketing vs. development
Links from the Show:
Nick Swan (@NickSwan) I Twitter
SEOTesting.com
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/27/2022 • 40 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode 625 | TinySeed Tales s3e4: Doubling MRR
In the fourth episode of TinySeed Tales Season 3, Rob Walling checks back in with Tony Chan of CloudForecast.
Tony shares that they’ve doubled their MRR in the last couple of months, and it feels like he has unlocked a cheat code.
Topics we cover:
2:02 - What’s changed since the last episode?
3:14 - Winning a huge enterprise deal that nearly doubled their MRR
5:21 - Deploying capital
12:31 - A key mindset shift that Tony had to make
13:33 - Tony’s experience at a recent TinySeed retreat
18:10 - Tony reflects on some low points
19:35 - What is he looking forward to?
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
CloudForecast
TinySeed Applications are now open
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/22/2022 • 21 minutes, 1 second
Episode 624 | Moving from Free to Paid, Prioritizing Marketing vs. Development, and More Listener Questions
In episode 624, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure as he answers some listener questions on topics ranging from customer interviews to transitioning from a free to a paid product and prioritizing marketing vs. development.
Topics we cover:
2:11 - What episodes should I start with to get up to speed?
3:27 - When to transition from a free to a paid product
11:37 - Customer interviews as a service
15:03 - Making the jump from software to manufacturing
19:32 - Prioritizing marketing vs. development
Links from the Show:
Greatest Hits
Spending Benchmarks for Private B2B SaaS Companies
How Much Do SaaS Companies Spend on Marketing?
MicroConf Locals
MicroConf Youtube Channel
MicroConf Connect
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
In the third episode of season 3 of TinySeed Tales, Rob Walling checks in with Tony Chan of CloudForecast to see how he is faring since his co-founder is now on paternity leave.
During this time, Tony shares a big win along with dealing with some hiring and growth setbacks.
Topics we cover:
1:24 - How the business is doing while Francois is on paternity leave
2:36 - Tony’s perspective on being a solo founder for the past 6 weeks
5:04 - Managing your own founder psychology
7:49 - How Tony is dealing with an unexpected sales slump
16:16 - Did Tony end up hiring a full-time SDR?
21:04 - Dealing with setbacks
22:41 - What Tony is looking forward to in the next couple of months
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
CloudForecast
TinySeed Applications are now open
Episode 613 | Hacking Your Founder Psychology
Summit
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/15/2022 • 27 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode 622 | Making Hard Product Decisions & Growth vs. Profitability with Derrick Reimer
In episode 622, join Rob Walling and fan favorite Derrick Reimer, the founder of SavvyCal, as they discuss topics like balancing profitability versus growth and deciding which features to build and not. They chat about some specific features that Derek has decided to build, those he has not decided to build, and the thought process behind them.
Topics we cover:
4:02 - Making product decisions
9:22 - Deciding on what features you are not going to build
19:12 - When to reply to debates on Twitter
27:42 - Twitter’s newsletter feature
31:40 - Derrick’s perspective on balancing profitability vs reinvesting in the business
43:10 - Is Rob scratching his maker itch by being an investor in companies through TinySeed, or is he missing building SaaS businesses?
46:29 - Should Rob join TikTok?
Links from the Show:
Derrick Reimer @derrickreimer I Twitter
SavvyCal
Applications for TinySeed’s Fall 2022 SaaS Accelerators Are Now Open
MicroConf Youtube Channel
High Signal
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/13/2022 • 49 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 621 | TinySeed Tales s3e2: Onboarding Their First Hires
In this episode of TinySeed Tales, Rob chats with Tony Chan from CloudForecast about the progress his rapidly growing team has made over the previous few weeks.
Tony is riding the roller coaster that is entrepreneurship and in this episode you get to follow along.
Topics we cover:
1:47 - New full time engineering hire onboarding results
4:50 - Part time SDR hire onboarding results
7:31 - How hiring affects company culture
10:19 - Tony’s biggest wins in the last few weeks
14:30 - Growing the product to grow Expansion Revenue
15:45 - CloudForecast’s summer sales lull
19:40 - Keeping sane as a founder
22:00 - What Tony is worried about coming out of summer
24:00 - The next MRR target
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
CloudForecast
TinySeed Applications open September 12, 2022
TinySeed Tales S2E1 I Introducing Gather
TinySeed Tales 1 I A Non-Technical Saas Founder
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/8/2022 • 25 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 620 | Finding SaaS Ideas, Customer Pain, SaaS Metrics, and More Listener Questions
In episode 620, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure as he answers some listener questions. These questions range from which SaaS business metrics to pay attention to and how to find good SaaS ideas to helping an employee transition from a task-level to a project-level thinker.
Topics we cover:
1:44- What SaaS business metrics matter the most?
11:21- Do you have any general observations about building a SaaS for non-technical customers?
16:00- How do you find a good SaaS idea?
24:41- How can I assist an employee in transitioning from a task-level to a project-level thinker?
Links from the Show:
Episode 480 I Stairstepping Your Way To SaaS with Christopher Gimmer
2022 State of Independent SaaS Report
The Stairstep Approach to Bootstrapping
TMBA 100 - Rip, Pivot, and Jam
MicroConf Connect
MicroConf Europe
Applications for TinySeed’s Fall 2022 SaaS Accelerators Will Open September 12th
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/6/2022 • 29 minutes, 11 seconds
Episode 619 | TinySeed Tales s3e1: Moving from Bootstrapped to Mostly Bootstrapped
Welcome to Season 3 of TinySeed Tales, where we follow the founders of one SaaS startup throughout a year as they share their struggles, victories, and failures.
On the first episode of Season 3, Rob introduces us to Tony Chan, the cofounder of CloudForecast. CloudForecast is a daily AWS cost monitoring service for busy engineering teams. Tony is one of 33 startup founders from TinySeed’s Spring 2021 accelerator batch.
Topics we cover:
2:41- What’s CloudForecast?
4:09- How large is the CloudForecast team?
6:54- Why did Tony apply to TinySeed?
8:30- Why Tony turned down venture capital offers?
13:48- Tony reflects on the added complexity of taking funding
19:47- Tony’s biggest fear
22:34- What is Tony looking forward to?
Links from the Show:
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) I Twitter
CloudForecast
TinySeed
Castos
Gather
TinySeed Tales S2E1 I Introducing Gather
TinySeed Tales S1E1 I A Non-Technical Saas Founder
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
9/1/2022 • 24 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 618 | How to Achieve Financial Freedom
In episode 618, join Rob Walling as he chats with Sam Dogen, the founder of Financial Samurai, which is one of the longest-running and most popular personal finance blogs. Over the last 13 years, Sam has personally written over 2,500 essays along with a Wall Street Journal Bestselling book. We talk about achieving financial freedom, money mindsets, and relentless execution.
Topics we cover:
3:12- The 4% Rule
4:40- Sam’s alternative approach to the 4% Rule
7:25- The FIRE Movement
10:16- How to navigate the US health insurance system as an early retiree
12:10- Sam’s relentless execution when it comes to running Financial Samurai
17:40- How Sam learned about personal finance
18:47- How Sam negotiated a severance package despite quitting his investment banking job
22:47- Why he runs Financial Samurai as a true lifestyle business
26:07- Would Sam sell Financial Samurai for $20 million?
27:35- The premise of Sam’s new book
28:46- Sam’s mental model for allocating financial assets to generate passive income
Links from the Show:
Sam Dogen (@financialsamura) I Twitter
Financial Samurai
Buy This, Not That
TropicalMBA
MicroConf Europe
Applications for TinySeed’s Fall 2022 SaaS Accelerators Will Open September 12th
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/30/2022 • 32 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode 617 | News Roundup: Profitwell $200M Exit, Spreadsheet Mentality, and Watching an Acquirer Ruin Your Company
In episode 617, Einar Vollset and Tracy Osborn join Rob Walling for a bootstrapper news roundup episode. They cover a wide range of topics from ProfitWell’s big 200 million exit, spreadsheet mentality, watching an acquirer ruin your company, and much more.
Topics we cover:
[3:06] What’s your take on ProfitWell’s acquisition?
[5:52] Watching an acquirer ruin your company
[14:03] The spreadsheet mentality
[23:09] If you can’t buy it twice, don’t buy it
[36:00] Balancing realism with optimism as a founder
Links from the Show:
Tracy Osborn @tracymakes I Twitter
Einar Vollset @einarvollset I Twitter
Episode 611 | Bootstrapping ProfitWell to a $200M Exit (with Patrick Campbell)
Watching an acquirer ruin your company
Episode 605 | Building a SaaS with Little Dev Experience, Using No Code for Your MVP, Bootstrapping a Two-Sided Marketplace, and More Listener Questions
The “Spreadsheet Mentality” sucks, and kills the efficacy of jobs
If You Can’t Buy It Twice, Don’t Buy It
14 Critical Things Investors Look for In A SaaS Startup
Applications for TinySeed’s Fall 2022 SaaS Accelerators Will Open September 12th
MicroConf Youtube Channel
MicroConf Europe
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/23/2022 • 40 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode 616 | An 8-Figure SaaS Founder's Approach to Remote Work
In episode 616, Rob Walling chats with Liam Martin, the co-founder of Time Doctor and author of the new book, “Running Remote: Master the Lessons from the World’s Most Successful Remote Work Pioneers.” We dig into the fundamentals of asynchronous communication, how to do remote work better, and some surprises they saw during the pandemic.
Episode Sponsor
Hiring developers has been tough for years, but it is even tougher these days. Lemon.io is on a mission to make the process of hiring an experienced developer or even an entire team easier. They only have experienced developers on their marketplace, and each one is hand-vetted. It is virtually risk-free as they’ll guarantee a replacement in 48 hours if something goes wrong.
Find your perfect developer or a team with Lemon.io. You can also claim a special discount for our podcast fans. Visit lemon.io/startups to receive a 15% discount for the first 4 weeks of work with a developer.
Topics we cover:
[2:46] What Liam has learned running Time Doctor for the past 12 years
[6:23] Can extroverts thrive long-term in a remote work environment?
[11:14] Liam’s approach to metrics and KPIs for engineering teams
[18:23] Why remote companies that move faster collaborate less
[21:31] How far can you take async communication in a remote team
[24:29] Combating isolation on remote teams
Links from the Show:
Liam Martin (@LiamRemote) I Twitter
Running Remote Book
Time Doctor
Deep Work: Rules for Focused Success in a Distracted World
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/16/2022 • 33 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode 615 | Bootstrappable Businesses, Cargo Culting, and How Pricing Affects Growth (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 615, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he covers what makes a business bootstrappable (and things to avoid), cargo culting, and how large of a business you can build at different customer lifetime value levels.
Episode Sponsor:
Hiring developers has been tough for years, but it is even tougher these days. Lemon.io is on a mission to make the process of hiring an experienced developer or even an entire team easier. They only have experienced developers on their marketplace, and each one is hand-vetted. It is virtually risk-free as they’ll guarantee a replacement in 48 hours if something goes wrong.
Find your perfect developer or a team with Lemon.io. You can also claim a special discount for our podcast fans. Visit lemon.io/startups to receive a 15% discount for the first 4 weeks of work with a developer.
Topics we cover:
[1:51] What makes a business bootstrappable?
[14:15] Cargo culting
[20:05] How large of a business can you build at a specific annual contract value or lifetime value?
Links from the Show:
Bootstrapper’s Guide to Outside Funding
Episode 613 I Hacking Your Founder Psychology
Episode 602 I Explaining SaaS Metrics to a Child
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/9/2022 • 27 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 614 | Deciding When to Quit Your Day Job, Founder Anxiety, and More Listener Questions
In episode 614, Rob Walling chats with fan favorite Derrick Reimer. They start out by talking about Derrick’s decision to take a sabbatical from The Art of Product podcast after co-hosting it with Ben Orenstein for more than 5 years. Then, they answer a handful of listener questions, including when to quit your day job to focus on your startup full-time, coping with anxiety as a second-time founder, and choosing a domain name.
Episode Sponsor:
Hiring developers has been tough for years, but it is even tougher these days. Lemon.io is on a mission to make the process of hiring an experienced developer or even an entire team easier. They only have experienced developers on their marketplace, and each one is hand-vetted. It is virtually risk-free as they’ll guarantee a replacement in 48 hours if something goes wrong.
Find your perfect developer or a team with Lemon.io. You can also claim a special discount for our podcast fans. Visit lemon.io/startups to receive a 15% discount for the first 4 weeks of work with a developer.
Topics we cover:
[2:18] Derrick’s decision to take a break from The Art of The Product podcast
[10:22] When should you go full-time on your startup?
[17:20] Before looking for tech firms, should I know the best frontend and backend architecture for my SaaS MVP and then only shop for firms who specialize in that?
[24:13] I'm starting a new SaaS business, and despite a previous successful experience, I can't stop feeling extremely anxious about it. Is this something you're familiar with? How did you deal with it?
[30:34] When choosing a domain name for my startup, should you go with a meaningful and expressive name, but a less serious TLD.io or a somewhat fictional name combined with the best tld.com?
Links from the Show:
Derrick Reimer @derrickreimer I Twitter
SavvyCal
The Art of Product
Bootstrapped Web
Summit
TinySeed
Bullet Train
MicroConf Connect
The Entrepreneur’s Guide to Keeping Your Shit Together: How to Run Your Business Without Letting it Run You
The Mom Test
How I Nabbe
8/2/2022 • 42 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 613 | Hacking Your Founder Psychology
In episode 613, Rob Walling chats with Dr. Sherry Walling about the release of her new book, Touching Two Worlds: A guide for finding hope in the landscape of loss. They cover a lot in this episode, including the hustle of launching a book, the behind the scenes of how Sherry has hacked her own psychology to help promote the book, and grief in entrepreneurship.
Episode Sponsor:
Hiring developers has been tough for years, but it is even tougher these days. Lemon.io is on a mission to make the process of hiring an experienced developer or even an entire team easier. They only have experienced developers on their marketplace, and each one is hand-vetted. It is virtually risk-free as they’ll guarantee a replacement in 48 hours if something goes wrong.
Find your perfect developer or a team with Lemon.io. You can also claim a special discount for our podcast fans. Visit lemon.io/startups to receive a 15% discount for the first 4 weeks of work with a developer.
Topics we cover:
[4:04] What it is like to publish a book with a traditional publisher
[5:30] The process of launching and promoting a book
[9:24] A clever way to reframe cold outreach
[15:52] Hacking your founder psychology
[21:03] A short book summary
Links from the Show:
Sherry Walling (@SherryWalling) I Twitter
Zen Founder
Touching Two Worlds: A guide for finding hope in the landscape of loss
Episode 585 I Moving Outside Your Comfort Zone with Dr. Sherry Walling
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/26/2022 • 30 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 612 | Balancing a Side Project and Going Full-time on Your Product
In episode 612, Rob Walling chats with longtime friend and repeat podcast guest Dave Rodenbaugh. Dave was even at the very first MicroConf back in 2011.
In this episode, we have a candid conversation on our experiences balancing side projects with a day job, struggling with the decision in our own different ways of when to quit, and the surprising habits you have to unlearn once you are finally independent of the day job and consulting work.
Topics we cover:
[1:27] Dave’s thought process behind expanding Recapture
[5:34] The decision to go full-time on Recapture
[15:05] Dave’s process for unlearning bad employee / consultant habits
[20:07] The danger of the arrival fallacy
[24:20] What would you do if you sold the business?
[26:03] Balancing a side project with your day job
Links from the Show:
Dave Rodenbaugh (@DaveRodenbaugh) I Twitter
Recapture
Rogue Startups
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/19/2022 • 37 minutes, 45 seconds
Episode 611 | Bootstrapping ProfitWell to a $200M Exit (with Patrick Campbell)
In episode 611, join Rob Walling as he chats with Patrick Campbell, the cofounder of ProfitWell, on how he and his co-founders bootstrapped ProfitWell to a $200 million exit.
Profitwell was acquired by Paddle earlier this year. We dive into a bunch of topics you have not heard elsewhere, including details about the actual transaction, what was the stock vs. cash split, the revenue breakdown of consulting versus SaaS when they sold as well as talking through his thought process as they were deciding whether to sell.
Topics we cover:
[3:53] Using their consulting business to fund and grow Profitwell in the early days
[8:23] The split between cash and stock in Profitwell’s acquisition
[9:49] The percentage of Profitwell’s revenue from consulting vs. SaaS
[13:39] The conversations that Patrick and his cofounders had from the get-go about their end goals and how much to reinvest in the business
[15:02] The ownership split between all of the cofounders
[17:08] How he made sure his employees were taken care of in the acquisition
[19:05] Did Patrick ever consider taking funding?
[26:14] How long it took to sell the business from the first contact with Paddle
[31:55] Why should SaaS founders take money off the table once they hit certain milestones?
[36:01] Patrick’s feelings about competing with Stripe
[42:15] Why Patrick moved to Puerto Rico
Links from the Show:
Patrick Campbell (@Patticus) I Twitter
Profitwell
Paddle
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/12/2022 • 47 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode 610 | How I Would Start Over Today, Bad Habits of Solopreneurs, and the Benefits of a Day Job (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 610, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure where he talks about the benefits of working a day job before launching your company, some bad habits he picked up in the early days, why the college dropout narrative is annoying, and what he would do if he was starting over today.
Topics we cover:
[1:08] The benefits of working a day job
[6:20] Some bad habits Rob learned as a solopreneur in the early days
[9:45] Why the college dropout narrative is bs
[12:51] What would Rob do if he was starting over today
[19:22] The benefits of starting a business today vs. 10 years ago
Links from the Show:
Episode 551 I Task-level vs. Project-level Thinkers, No such Thing as an Autopilot Business, and More
The Stair Step Approach to bootstrapping
Quiet Light
68 B2B SaaS marketplaces with opportunities for indie hackers
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/5/2022 • 29 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 609 | Building Your MVP, the Bug Fix Hamster Wheel, and More Listener Questions
In episode 609, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure as he answers a handful of listener questions ranging from when it makes sense to have multiple LLCs and hiring task-level vs. project-level thinkers to planning for large projects. He also shares his thought process behind ways you can build a complex mobile app prototype in a capital efficient manner.
Topics we cover:
[1:56] Is it worth it to create multiple LLCs?
[6:10] Do you have any tips for how to find the time to work on future improvements when it feels like you don't have time to do anything but fix bugs and answer support tickets?
[13:01] Do you have any advice around how to build a complex mobile app MVP in a capital efficient manner?
[20:30] Should internal company, marketing and transactional emails be on the same domain?
[22:27] How do you plan for a large project?
Links from the Show:
Episode 551 I Task-level vs. Project-level Thinkers, No such Thing as an Autopilot Business, and More
MicroConf Connect
Episode 505 I 42 Side Projects and the #NoCode Movement
Github Issues
Episode 311 I What’s It’s Like Selling a $128k Side Project
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/28/2022 • 26 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 608 | Bootstrapping (and Exiting) a 7-Figure Info Product
In episode 608, Rob Walling chats with Adrian Rosebrock, who bootstrapped and successfully exited his seven-figure info product company, PyImageSearch, in 2021. PyImageSearch provided digital courses around visual image detection and image classification in Python.
Adrian wasn’t always an entrepreneur. He graduated with a PhD in computer science, got a day job, realized early on that he hated it, and just stair-stepped his way up to running a successful business. In this episode, we cover a lot including Adrian’s decision to start blogging and launch a Kickstarter campaign in the early days to learning how to hire employees and making the decision to sell the business in 2021.
Episode Sponsor:
Microsoft for Startups Founder Hub
Microsoft for Startups is on a mission to help all founders innovate and grow no matter their background, location, or progress. Microsoft for Startups Founders Hub is a platform that provides founders with free resources to help solve startup challenges, including access to Azure credits, development tools like Github, mentorship resources, Microsoft collaboration and productivity software like Teams and Outlook and more. The program is open to all and takes 5 minutes to sign up, with no funding required.
Learn more aka.ms/startupsfortherestofus
Topics we cover:
[2:41] The story of how Adrian first discovered MicroConf
[6:29] Why Adrian didn’t want to go down the traditional path after getting his PhD in computer science
[10:01] When he knew having a traditional day job as an employee wasn’t for him
[11:24] How he used the stair-step approach to launch PyImageSearch
[13:54] What Adrian did when he started to see early traction
[16:45] Did having a PhD in computer science have a big impact in the early days of launching his business?
[18:05] Adrian’s approach to learning how to market
[20:31] How he balanced working a day job and his side business in the early days
[23:39] Adrian’s launch plan for selling his first ebook in 2014
[28:48] The epiphanies that Adrian had in the early days to keep plugging away
[33:33] How he went from making $38,000 in 2014 to $600,000 in 2016 as a company of one
[36:28] The mindset shifts he had to make when he started hiring employees
[39:10] Adrian’s decision to sell the business
[45:03] His reflections after selling the business in 2021
Links from the Show:
Adrian Rosebrock @InfoProdMastery I Twitter
PyImageSearch
Info Product Mastery
The Stair Step Approach to Bootstrapping
Ryan Delk: Lifting The Veil: The Data Behind Successful Product Launches I Youtube
Quiet Light
If you have questions about starting or scaling a soft
6/21/2022 • 50 minutes, 51 seconds
Episode 607 | Overcoming Plateaus, Stealth Launches, Founder-Driven Sales, and More Listener Questions
In episode 607, Rob Walling chats with Asia Orangio, and they answer listener questions about customer onboarding videos, overcoming revenue plateaus, stealth launches, and founder-driven sales.
Topics we cover:
[1:12] Where’s the best place to put customer onboarding videos?
[5:37] How to scale a content business
[15:36] What to do if revenue has plateaued?
[21:41] When to do a stealth launch
[26:30] Is it possible for a SaaS product to sell to the enterprise without a dedicated sales team?
Links from the Show:
Asia Orangio (@AsiaOrangio) I Twitter
DemandMaven
In Demand
Productize & Scale
SaaS Metrics
MicroConf Youtube Channel
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/14/2022 • 34 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode 606 | The Podcasting Landscape, Keeping Your Saw Sharpened, and Scaling Your Team with Craig Hewitt
In episode 606, Rob Walling chats with Craig Hewitt, the founder of Castos. They talk about company building, staying up to speed when you are no longer doing the day-to-day tasks as well as their thoughts on a recent string of acquisitions happening in the podcast ecosystem.
Topics we cover:
[1:24] 2 MicroConf Local events happening in Chicago and Denver
[3:50] The pros and cons of Spotify acquiring a couple of podcast analytics platforms
[7:51] The specific challenges with podcast analytics
[12:39] Spotify vs. Apple
[16:31] Staying up to speed as CEO once you have a team doing the day-to-day tasks
[28:32] Implementing OKRs at Castos
[33:07] Castos’ Mission
Links from the Show:
Craig Hewitt (@TheCraigHewitt) I Twitter
Castos
MicroConf Local
Seeking Scale
Rogue Startups
Bootstrapped Web
Tempo I Castos
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/7/2022 • 34 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode 605 | Building a SaaS with Little Dev Experience, Using No Code for Your MVP, Bootstrapping a Two-Sided Marketplace, and More Listener Questions
In episode 605, Rob Walling is joined by Ruben Gamez, and they dig into a handful of listener questions. Topics range from building a SaaS with little development experience and using no-code tools to build your MVP to stair-stepping bootstrapping a two-sided marketplace.
Topics we cover:
[0:55] Selling to the enterprise
[4:31] What level of development expertise would you say the founders of a B2B SaaS should have in order to create a successful product?
[13:26] Should you launch a productized service to validate a SaaS idea before building it?
[20:47] Can you use the stairstep method to bootstrap a two-sided marketplace business?
[31:34] Is no-code something you see mainly for building an MVP, or is it something that you could sustainably build an actual SaaS startup on without running into scaling issues? What are the downside risks to no-code tools other than platform risk?
[37:08] Do you think no-code tools will ever get to the point where you can build a full SaaS business?
Links from the Show:
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) I Twitter
SignWell
RocketGems
Castos
Bubble
Airtable
Dynamite Jobs
Clarity.fm
MicroConf Masterminds
The SaaS Founder Guide to No-Code
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/31/2022 • 42 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 604 | How to Decide Which Features to Build (with Derrick Reimer)
In episode 604, Rob Walling talks with Derrick Reimer and gets the latest update on SavvyCal, how he makes product decisions, and they also share the best things they’ve bought for $100 and $1000 that have added much more value to their lives than the price point.
Topics we cover:
[4:50] Apple’s influence on startup founders
[8:52] SavvyCal’s new Squadcast integration
[12:51] Some upcoming features in the works for SavvyCal
[14:05] Experimenting with a freemium feature—meeting polls
[17:07] Derrick’s mental framework for deciding what features to build next
[23:58] Switching from an employee to a founder mindset
[25:56] Would you rather fight one duck-sized horse or a thousand duck-sized horses?
[27:25] The best purchase Derrick has made for under $100 in the last 6 months
[33:14] The best purchase Derrick has made for under $1000 in the last 6 months
Links from the Show:
Derrick Reimer (@DerrickReimer) I Twitter
SavvyCal
Squadcast
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/24/2022 • 41 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 603 | Bootstrapping HotJar to $40M ARR Using D2C Marketing
In episode 603, Rob Walling chats with David Darmanin, one of the founders of Hotjar. Hotjar was bootstrapped to $40 million ARR with a fully distributed team of 170 employees. David and his cofounders sold the company for a 9-figure exit in 2021.
From their incredible launch story and their unique DTC approach to sales and marketing in a B2B SaaS business to David’s mental models and the thought process behind selling the business, there is no shortage of key insights in this episode.
Topics we cover:
[5:07] How David initially financed building Hotjar
[8:11] The biggest difference between Hotjar and its competitors
[12:03] The unique approach that David took when launching Hotjar
[12:44] Lessons learned from a failed product launch prior to Hotjar
[15:01] How they built their initial launch list to 60,000 subscribers
[19:32] How to know how much to spend on paid ads
[24:53] Why David said it was easy to work 60-80 hour workweeks for the first 6-9 months of Hotjar
[27:22] The two key ingredients needed if you want to sell a low-priced SaaS product
[30:31] How they tripled their growth from $1M - $3M in the first year
[33:26] How their initial launch strategy gave them a major competitive advantage when they started doing content marketing later on
[34:03] What led him to sell Hotjar
[40:39] How long the exit process took
Links from the Show:
David Darmanin @DavidDarmanin I Twitter
Hotjar
Episode 569 I The Life-Changing Decision of When to Sell your Company
How a 7-hour workweek led to Anna Maste’s 7-figure sale I They Got Acquired
Conversion Rate Experts
Delivering Happiness
Selling The Invisible
The Dip
Built to Sell
The Great CEO Within
Let My People Go Surfing
Just Cause
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an
5/17/2022 • 44 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode 602 | Explaining SaaS Metrics to a Child
In episode 602, Rob Walling explains SaaS metrics to his kid. This is a great episode to listen to if you are unfamiliar or not well-versed in SaaS because we dig into from first principles, starting with dollars, revenue, and the purpose of businesses, all the way to SaaS metrics like MRR, ACV, and LTV. And, even if you are well-versed in SaaS metrics, you’ll likely learn a few things from this conversation.
Episode Sponsor:
Microsoft for Startups Founder Hub
Microsoft for Startups is on a mission to help all founders innovate and grow no matter their background, location, or progress. Microsoft for Startups Founders Hub is a platform that provides founders with free resources to help solve startup challenges, including access to Azure credits, development tools like Github, mentorship resources, Microsoft collaboration and productivity software like Teams and Outlook and more. The program is open to all and takes 5 minutes to sign up, with no funding required.
Learn more aka.ms/startupsfortherestofus
Topics we cover:
[1:55] MicroConf Local London tickets are on sale
[3:17] Starting with the basics: money, dollars, and businesses
[7:01] Revenue
[7:12] Expenses
[10:51] SaaS
[13:29] Recurring revenue
[13:58] Average revenue per account (ARPA)
[14:56] Monthly recurring revenue (MRR)
[15:08] Average revenue per customer
[17:08] Annual contract value (ACV)
[18:18] Churn
[19:30] Differences between Revenue Churn and Customer Churn
[21:18] Lifetime value
[22:10] Average customer lifetime value
[25:49] Customer Acquisition Cost (CAC)
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/10/2022 • 29 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 601 | Bootstrapping B2B vs. B2C
In episode 601, Rob Walling chats with Nick Fogle of ChurnKey. Nick previously cofounded Wavve which was acquired in early 2021. In this conversation, they chat about how the idea for Churnkey came from his other business, decision to sell Wavve, and some of the key differences between bootstrapping a B2C vs a B2B SaaS.
Topics we cover:
[2:11] Tips for reducing churn
[3:26] Asking for feedback at the point of cancellation via feedback surveys
[8:09] When he knew it was the right time to double down on ChurnKey
[9:06] A piece of advice for bootstrappers looking for SaaS business ideas
[14:44] The process Nick and his cofounder used to sell Wavve for a life-changing exit.
[22:13] The potential pitfalls of off-market deals
[26:56] His initial reaction after selling Wavve
[29:04] The key differences between selling B2B and B2C
[30:36] Why Nick made the difference to hire a head of sales for ChurnKey
[32:14] The mindset shifts he had to unlock around shifting from low touch to high touch sales
[33:43] Why he decided to join the current batch of TinySeed
Links from the Show:
Nick Fogle (@nickfogle) I Twitter
Churnkey
Wavve
TinySeed
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
5/3/2022 • 39 minutes, 15 seconds
Episode 600 | When to Hire Your First Manager + What You Should Be Focused On (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 600, join Rob Walling for a solo adventure as he dives into topics ranging from when to hire your first manager to a mental framework for deciding which things to work on vs. what to delegate to your team. He also shares his thought process behind when things take multiple iterations and how to know whether or not you are on the right track.
Episode Sponsor:
Microsoft for Startups Founder Hub
Microsoft for Startups is on a mission to help all founders innovate and grow no matter their background, location, or progress. Microsoft for Startups Founders Hub is a platform that provides founders with free resources to help solve startup challenges, including access to Azure credits, development tools like Github, mentorship resources, Microsoft collaboration and productivity software like Teams and Outlook and more. The program is open to all and takes 5 minutes to sign up, with no funding required.
Learn more aka.ms/startupsfortherestofus
Topics we cover:
[1:04] A mental framework for deciding what things you should focus on as a SaaS founder vs. what to delegate
[7:28] The importance of resting and taking proper breaks as a SaaS founder
[14:28] When to hire your first manager
[14:50] The two main components of management: supervising and leading
[18:45] The importance of continuous iterations
[26:21] Why you need to manage your own psychology as a founder
[28:11] Hitting a big podcast milestone: 600 episodes
Links from the Show:
Strawberry Fields I Beatles
Yesterday I Beatles
Episode 200: Customer Acquisition Plans for Bootstrappers
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/26/2022 • 30 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 599 | Finding the Bootstrapper Hockey Stick
In episode 599, Rob Walling chats with Dominic “Dom” and Tracy Phillips of CodeSubmit. CodeSubmit provides a library of real-world, take-home tasks in more than 60 coding languages. Some of their customers are Audi, Netflix, Carbon Health, 3M, and Apple.
Dom and Tracy were also a part of the spring 2020 batch of TinySeed. During that year, they managed to 25x their MRR. In this episode, we’re digging into how they did that, what led to their bootstrapped hockey stick growth moment, what it is like working on a company with your spouse, and much more.
Topics we cover:
[2:20] How Dom and Tracy came up with the idea for CodeSubmit
[6:59] The approach they used to build their product MVP on nights and weekends
[11:16] Running a startup with your spouse
[13:42] The catalyst that led to their hockey stick growth moment
[17:06] When they knew they had product market fit
[21:46] The number of different marketing channels they tried before they decided to double down on content marketing and SEO
[26:19] The biggest mistakes that hiring managers and recruiters make when vetting new developers via take-home challenges
[29:40] Thoughts on building a lifestyle business
Links from the Show:
CodeSubmit
Dominic Phillips @domrdy I Twitter
Tracy Phillips @tracy_s9z I Twitter
ScrapingBee
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/19/2022 • 33 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 598 | Diversity, Mission & Values, How to Start, and More Listener Questions
In episode 598, join Rob Walling as he answers listener emails. Topics range from diversity in the startup ecosystem and when’s the right time to write your company’s mission, philosophy, and values to how to find good business ideas and the different approaches for developing features for a new app.
Episode Sponsor:
Microsoft for Startups Founder Hub
Microsoft for Startups is on a mission to help all founders innovate and grow no matter their background, location, or progress. Microsoft for Startups Founders Hub is a platform that provides founders with free resources to help solve startup challenges, including access to Azure credits, development tools like Github, mentorship resources, Microsoft collaboration and productivity software like Teams and Outlook and more. The program is open to all and takes 5 minutes to sign up, with no funding required.
Learn more aka.ms/startupsfortherestofus
Topics we cover:
[1:21] MicroConf Remote 4.0
[1:59] Improving diversity in the startup ecosystem
[8:11] Is bootstrapping the great equalizer in business?
[8:51] The right time to work on company values, mission statements, and philosophy
[14:02] Developing features for a new app
[15:18] How to figure out your minimum lovable product
[21:18] How to find business ideas
Links from the Show:
State of Independent SaaS
The Updated Survival Guide for Bootstrapping SaaS I MicroConf On Air
Episode 589 I Finding a SaaS idea through 70 cold calls
My First Million
Tropical MBA
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/12/2022 • 26 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 597 | The Challenge of Building a Business in a Regulated Industry
In episode 597, Rob Walling chats with Ashley Baxter, the founder of With Jack. With Jack gives peace of mind and protection for UK freelancers through insurance, professional indemnity, public liability, contracts, legal expenses, etc.
We dig into the lessons Ashley learned from a failed insurance business she inherited from her father, how she used her freelance photography to fund With Jack in the early days, along with sharing many of the successes and failures she has had on her entrepreneurial journey.
Topics we cover:
[1:49] Tickets for MicroConf Remote 4.0 are now on sale
[2:55] Putting a tech twist on a regulated industry
[3:27] Improving the onboarding experience
[5:24] How Ashley came up with the name for her business, With Jack
[8:24] How she used the money from her freelance photography business to fund the early development costs for With Jack
[10:16] Lessons learned from taking over her father’s insurance business at 18
[15:20] The danger of depending on only one channel to run your business
[17:49] Ashley’s three pivotal business moments
[21:27] The concept of a vitamin vs. painkiller business
[27:10] The challenges of hiring an executive or admin assistant in a highly regulated industry
[28:42] How Ashley responded when a competitor stole her website design
[31:17] Why you shouldn’t be intimidated if a competitor gets funding
Links from the Show:
Ashley Baxter @iamashley I Twitter
With Jack I Company Website
Ashley Baxter I Ashley’s website
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/5/2022 • 37 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode 596 | News Round-Up: Google Ends WFH, Founder Salaries, How to Use Email
In episode 596, Rob Walling is joined by Einar Vollset and Tracy Osborn for a bootstrapper news roundup episode. They cover a wide range of topics from Google’s decision to bring employees back into the office (and the potential implications for bootstrapped companies), founder salary data trends, email management strategies, and much more.
Episode Sponsor:
Microsoft for Startups Founder Hub
Microsoft for Startups is on a mission to help all founders innovate and grow no matter their background, location, or progress. Microsoft for Startups Founders Hub is a platform that provides founders with free resources to help solve startup challenges, including access to Azure credits, development tools like Github, mentorship resources, Microsoft collaboration and productivity software like Teams and Outlook and more. The program is open to all and takes 5 minutes to sign up, with no funding required.
Learn more aka.ms/startupsfortherestofus
Topics we cover:
[0:59] The State of Independent SaaS Report & Livestream
[5:38] Google is ending work from home options for most Bay Area employees
[12:11] How much do startup founders pay themselves?
[14:51] The impact on having cofounders and salaries
[19:41] Why you are probably using email wrong
[26:21] Rob’s system for filtering emails
[30:45] Twitter is making it harder to choose the reverse chronological feed
[37:37] Practical strategies for working with and getting money to your existing developers in Ukraine and Russia
Links from the Show:
Google mandates workers back to Silicon Valley, other offices from April 4 I Reuters
What do startup founders pay themselves? I Sifted
Twitter makes it harder to choose the old reverse-chronological feed I The Verge
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/29/2022 • 40 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 595 | TinySeed Tales Season 2: Where Are They Now?
In episode 595, Rob Walling catches up with Brian and Scottie Elliott, the husband and wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management SaaS. This husband and wife duo shared their victories, challenges, and failures, including a cash crunch, moving upmarket, and managing to double revenue over their nine episodes of TinySeed Tales Season 2.
It’s been over a year since they were last on the podcast and wanted to see how the company is doing. It turns out Gather is on track to 10x their MRR.
In this episode, we reflect on what they learned in the last year, how their thought process has evolved around deploying capital to grow the business, and what they are most excited about in 2022.
Topics we cover:
[3:33] How Gather is on track to 10x MRR
[4:26] Shifting from solo designers and small design firms to catering to large firms
[5:51] Moving upmarket
[8:28] Why they shut down Gather consulting services
[10:38] How they knew when they had product-market fit
[12:57] How they bounced back after their developer accidentally crashed their entire app
[20:11] Their thought process for deploying capital to grow the business
[23:02] What they are most excited about in 2022
Links from the Show:
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott (@brianleeelliott) | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven’t already, be sure to check out all of Season 2 of TinySeed Tales with Brian and Scottie and Season 1 of TinySeed Tales, where we follow the SaaS journey with Craig Hewitt of Castos.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/22/2022 • 25 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode 594 | Starting Over with the TropicalMBA's Dan & Ian
In Episode 594, Rob Walling chats with Dan Andrews and Ian Schoen, the founders of Dynamite Jobs and the TropicalMBA podcast. We talk about how they started over. They started a new business, Dynamite Jobs, a couple of years after selling their physical products company back in 2015.
Episode Sponsor:
Microsoft for Startups Founder Hub
Microsoft for Startups is on a mission to help all founders innovate and grow no matter their background, location, or progress. Microsoft for Startups Founders Hub is a platform that provides founders with free resources to help solve startup challenges, including access to Azure credits, development tools like Github, mentorship resources, Microsoft collaboration and productivity software like Teams and Outlook and more. The program is open to all and takes 5 minutes to sign up, with no funding required.
Learn more aka.ms/startupsfortherestofus
Dynamite Jobs was born after seeing a need within their community, The Dynamite Circle, a community for location independent entrepreneurs. It’s a need that would be hard for most people to bootstrap because it is a two-sided marketplace, but Dan and Ian had an advantage with their existing business and audience, and were able to capitalize on it.
In fact, after humble beginnings, the business has grown 10x in the last year.
In this episode, we chat about how they are bootstrapping and growing a two-sided marketplace, along with a wide range of other topics.
Topics we cover:
[2:37] Why Dan and Ian both settled in Austin, Texas and the unexpected benefits that has had for their businesses
[3:22] Why their digital nomad journey in the early days was born out of necessity
[4:35] The events that led to the first DCBKK event in 2012 and the impact it had on their business
[6:16] Embracing the chops index instead of the old school digital marketer “guru” model
[8:21] The ideas that led Dan and Ian to start Dynamite Jobs in 2017
[14:46] The first key metric for Dynamite Jobs back in the early days
[17:12] How deciding to hire a CTO was the catalyst that scaled Dynamite Jobs exponentially in late summer 2020
[20:34] The critical mistake they made that cost them months of development time
[22:51] The concept of CEO bombing vs. diving deeper into the core features that matter
[24:53] The 1000 day principle
[28:14] Where Dynamite Jobs is in relation to the 1000 day principle
[29:00] How they 10x’ed the revenue for Dynamite Jobs in 2021
[30:26] The value of hiring senior people who are better than you
[35:59] Actionable tips for recruiting and hiring great people
[38:44] The lowest cost, highest leverage hiring advantage for founders
[41:21] The rip, pivot and jam framework
[43:14] Why some of their “best ideas” turned out to be the biggest failures
Links from the Show:
Tropical MBA
Dynamite Jobs
<a href="https://twitter.com/tropicalmba" target="_blank" rel="noopen
3/15/2022 • 46 minutes, 6 seconds
Episode 593 | Retaining Employees + The Ideal SaaS Business (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In Episode 593, join Rob Walling for a Solo Adventure as he chats about accidentally deleting all of his old tweets, retaining talent, the ideal market for a SaaS business, and more.
The topics we cover
[3:10] Deleting old tweets
[8:43] Retaining talent
[12:39] Ideal market for a SaaS business
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/8/2022 • 25 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 592 | Nine Tactics for Amazing Customer Support
In Episode 592, Rob Walling is joined again by Cody Duval for a technical conversation about the dos and don'ts for amazing customer support.
The topics we cover
[2:00] Customer success vs customer support
[5:10] Response time
[8:59] Post-support surveys
[10:58] When to hire first customer support person
[13:02] Chat widgets
[17:09] Doing customer support early on as a founder
[18:01] Training customer support to ask a question
[19:00] Dealing with abusive customers
[21:10] Customer support tool
Links from the show
How to Deal with Rude Customers
Cody Duval (@codee) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/1/2022 • 30 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 591 | Acquiring and Scaling in a Crowded Space
In Episode 591, Rob Walling chats with Cody Duvall about his story of acquiring and growing Keeping in a really crowded space of help desk and customer support tools.
The topics we cover
[4:34] Launching into a crowded market
[8:00] Keeping's sales process
[10:01] Background on acquiring Keeping
[14:53] Outsourcing a team to rewrite the codebase
[20:03] Migrating customers
[24;01] Challenges with building in a established category
[26:09] Hitting product-market fit
[28:30] Applying for TinySeed
Links from the show
Keeping
Cody Duvall (@codee) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/22/2022 • 34 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode 590 | Buying vs Building, Zombie Companies, and More Listener Questions with Craig Hewitt
In Episode 590, Rob Walling chats with Craig Hewitt about building versus buying internal tools, how to compete in a competitive space, accounting software, a founder who has a zombie company where investors want their money back, and more.
The topics we cover
[5:03] Finding a co-founder as a non-technical founder
[11:20] Balancing priorities between day job and a SaaS idea
[17:35] Zombie company where investors want their money back
[26:00] Accounting software for startups
[28:10] Building in a competitive market as a solo-founder
[32:24] When to buy vs build internal tools
Links from the show
The Mom Test - a book by Rob Fitzpatrick
Audience Podcast
Bench Accounting | Online Bookkeeping and Tax Filing Services for Your Small Business
Craig Hewitt (@thecraighewitt) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/15/2022 • 37 minutes, 3 seconds
Episode 589 | Finding a SaaS Idea Through 70 Cold Calls
In Episode 589, Rob Walling chats with Jason Buckingham about how he found a startup idea from making more than 70 cold calls. It's a great story about staying focused, putting in the time and doing the hard work.
The topics we cover
[7:14] Finding a problem via cold calls
[13:07] Identifying a problem and deciding what to do next
[22:32] Getting spouses on board with entrepreneur journey
[25:06] Working day jobs while building the product
[30:09] Getting into Tiny Seed right before COVID-19
Links from the show
Episode 45: Onboarding Your Spouse | Zen Founder
Senior Place - Senior Placement and Referral Agency Software
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/8/2022 • 34 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode 588 | In Which Courtland Allen and I Cover a Lot of Startups Topics
In Episode 588, Rob Walling chats with Courtland Allen about a wide range of bootstrapper and indie hacker topics including the struggles with motivation/depression, bootstrapping today, fighting the urge to quit, and frameworks for getting your first dollar.
The topics we cover
[3:43] Hiring a podcast producer
[6:21] Letting go in business
[7:09] Invite-only experiment on Indie Hackers
[16:03] Thinking about the future
[20:47] Financial freedom and starting a business
[25:05] Depression as a founder and rediscovering purpose
[37:10] Fighting the urge to quit
[41:10] Getting your first dollar
[52:35] The bootstrapper scene in 2010 and the relevance of bootstrapping
Links from the show
Rob Walling on Twitter
The Time Paradox: The New Psychology of Time That Will Change Your Life
Courtland Allen (@csallen) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Also, if you haven't seen, applications are open for TinySeed's Spring 2022 programs. TinySeed is a year-long remote accelerator program is designed to help founders with a revenue-generating SaaS optimize product-market fit and grow faster. Read about the program and how to apply here.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/1/2022 • 1 hour, 4 minutes, 52 seconds
Episode 587 | Renaming a Company, Revisiting Inflation, and Micropreneurship (Listener Email Edition)
In Episode 587, join Rob Walling as he answers listener emails including feedback and a critique about the podcast, the state of microentrepreneurship, and where to start with user growth.
The topics we cover
[2:22] The reason Rob continues to podcast
[5:26] Renaming a company or podcast
[8:40] Revisiting inflation
[15:06] The state of microentrepreneurship
[20:00] Where to start with user growth
Links from the show
Where to Publish Plugins
Episode 581 | Inflation for Founders
Start Small Stay Small
Quiet Light Brokerage
MicroAcquire, the #1 Startup Acquisition Marketplace
Empire Flippers
Rob Walling - Serial Entrepreneur | Building, Launching and Growing Startups
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/25/2022 • 26 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode 586 | Mastering Customer Interviews with Michele Hansen
In Episode 586, Rob Walling chats with Michele Hansen about her new book where she talks about how to master customer interviews as a startup founder.
The topics we cover
[5:00] User experience research for startup founders
[11:20] Customer Interviews for developers
[12:30] Feature requests as customer research springboard
[19:55] Practicing customer interviews
[23:37] Comparing to Jobs to Be Done framework
Links from the show
Deploy Empathy: A practical guide for talking to customers
Software Social
Episode 524 | Bootstrapping a Commodity SaaS
Michele Hansen (@mjwhansen) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/18/2022 • 27 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode 585 | Moving Outside Your Comfort Zone with Dr. Sherry Walling
In Episode 585, Rob Walling chats with Sherry Walling about moving outside your comfort zone, the power of relationships, psychedelic-assisted therapy, as well as her new book about grief launching later this year.
The topics we cover
[3:22] Deciding against self-publishing
[12:00 ] Building an audience vs. a network
[14:26] Psychedelic-assisted therapy
[24:00] The power and importance of relationships
Links from the show
The Entrepreneur's Guide To Keeping Your Sh*t Together
Touching Two Worlds: A Guide for Finding Hope in the Landscape of Loss
Sherry Walling (@zenfounder) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/11/2022 • 30 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 584 | Looking Back and Looking Ahead
In Episode 584, Join Rob Walling for a Happy New Year edition of the show where looks ahead to 2022 and evaluates what he wants to focus on. The things we choose not to do are just as important as the things we chose to do and Rob encourages you to think hard about what is and is not working for you today.
The topics we cover
[3:00] Founder's retreat
[4:36] Estimating growth
[9:23] Hiring a full-time content producer
[15:32] The power of focus
Links from the show
The Zen Founder Guide to Founder Retreats
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/4/2022 • 17 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode 583 | Finding Startup Ideas with Sam Parr
In Episode 583, Rob Walling chats with Sam Parr about about building an email list, selling to Hubspot, podcast growth, and how to spot business opportunities.
The topics we cover
[3:53] Building Hustle to 8 figures in revenue
[5:52] Growing an email list
[11:01] Selling to a B2B SaaS
[19:00] My First Million and growing podcasts
[23:45] TikTok marketing
[27:30] Spotting interesting opportunities
[34:70] Manifest cowboy
Links from the show
Sam Parr (@theSamParr) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/28/2021 • 39 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode 582 | Enterprise Sales, Crowdfunding, Replacing Yourself, and More Listener Questions
In Episode 582, Rob Walling is joined by Einar Vollset to answer listener questions about enterprise sales, crowdfunding, replacing yourself, and things that every B2B SaaS founder should know.
The topics we cover
[1:26] Investing with Reg CF
[6:20] Enterprise plans and pricing
[13:31] Finding your replacement
[19:29] Best way to give software demos
[21:55] What fundamental things should startup founders should know
Links from the show
Sales Funnel Optimization for Bootstrapped Founders – Steli Efti – MicroConf Europe 2019
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/21/2021 • 33 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 581 | Inflation for Founders
In Episode 581, Rob Walling discusses how to grow money sensibly while protecting the principle during inflationary times. He explores real estate, collectibles, crypto, stocks, bonds, and other strategies to consider as inflation and other economic changes occur.
The topics we cover
[2:00] Inflation is here
[7:20] Pricing flexibility with SaaS
[9:44] Rules when inflation goes up
[13:53] Inflation and home mortgages
[16:29] Emergency funds during inflation
[17:36] Bonds during inflationary times
[18:40] Growth stocks
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/14/2021 • 24 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode 580 | Seven SEO Tips Every SaaS Can Use (with Ross Hudgens)
In Episode 580, Rob Walling chats with Ross Hudgins, an SEO expert, about seven common things that SaaS founders either do well or frequently get wrong.
The topics we cover
[4:42] Put your blog in a subfolder, not a subdomain.
[7:18] With keyword-focused content, make the URL exactly the main keyword.
[10:10] Be thoughtful about feature page keywords
[13:39] It’s really hard to rank for “best X software” queries
[16:24] Use on-page content marketing best practices
[20:50] Build passive link assets around keyword
[22:58] Answer keyword questions immediately, right after the H1
Links from the show
On-Page Content Marketing Best Practices
Readability: the Optimal Line Length
Ross Hudgins (@RossHudgens) | Twitter
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from Google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/7/2021 • 28 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 579 | The SaaS Fundraising Landscape (+The TinySeed Syndicate)
In this special episode of Startups For the Rest of Us, Rob Walling chats with Einar Vollset about not only the announcement of the TinySeed Syndicate but also the investment landscape for B2B SaaS today. Even if you don't think you'll raise funding, it's important to understand the dynamics of the investment and acquisition market as a bootstrapped founder.
The topics we cover
[1:40] Investment landscape for bootstrapped SaaS
[10:26] What is a syndicate?
[13:57] Introducing the TinySeed Syndicate
Links from the show
Invest — TinySeed
Apply — TinySeed
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling SaaS that you'd like us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/1/2021 • 21 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 578 | How Mike's Merger Panned Out
In Episode 578, Rob Walling is joined again by co-host emeritus, Mike Taber for an update on his progress with Bluetick. Today we find out how Mike's merger that he has been working on for the past year has panned out.
The topics we cover
[3:55] Mike reflects on time and effort working on partnership
[7:20] What to do when a deal stalls
[9:00] Doubling down on Bluetick
[14:50] Differentiating Bluetick
[17:47] Moving fast as a startup
[19:03] Finding your intrinsic motivation
[26:10] Mike's 90 day plan
Links from the show
Bluetick.io
Mike Taber (@SingleFounder) | Twitter
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from Google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/30/2021 • 29 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 577 | Finding the Right Problem to Solve
In Episode 577, Rob Walling chats with Jim Kalbach about how to uncover the right problem to solve with the Jobs to Be Done (JTBD) framework. If you haven't been exposed to JTBD, this episode will be a great primer as we dive into practical examples for bootstrapped or mostly-bootstrapped founders.
The topics we cover
[3:00] Defining Jobs to Be Done (JTBD)
[6:45] JTBD are stable over time
[10:27] Be solution-agnostic
[11:20] JTBD for pre-product or pre-solution
[17:53] Questions to ask to find JTBD
[20:50] Switch interviews
[24:41] A switch interview case study
Links from the show
The Jobs To Be Done Playbook: Align Your Markets, Organization, and Strategy Around Customer Needs
JTBD Toolkit
Jim Kalbach (@jimkalbach) | Twitter
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from Google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/23/2021 • 30 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 576 | Don't Become a Media Company (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In Episode 576, Rob Walling chats about permissionless entrepreneurship, why you probably shouldn't be a media company if you're an early stage or bootstrapped SaaS, and the importance of exploring beyond what your customers ask for to find out what they actually need.
The topics we cover
[2:01] Permissionless entrepreneur
[9:25] All startups should not become media companies
[15:10] Find out what your customers need, not what they ask for
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from Google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/16/2021 • 19 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode 575 | Shipping Code, Pivoting, and More Listener Questions with Derrick Reimer
In Episode 575, Rob Walling is joined by Derrick Reimer for a quick update on SavvyCal and some recent hiring decisions he has made. They also answer listener questions about shipping code as a bootstrapper, pivoting, selling a business through a broker, and more
The topics we cover
[2:23] The latest with SavvyCal
[12:02] Shipping code as a bootstrapper vs larger team
[21:39] Considering a zoom-in pivot
[25:15] Progressive web app vs two native app
[28:20] Thoughts on white-label approach for SaaS
[33:55] Selling a bootstrapped business through a broker
Links from the show
Episode 530 | Making Development Decisions, Regrets about Selling, and More Listener Questions (with Derrick Reimer)
Episode 559 | Bootstrapping a Two-Sided Marketplace with MicroAquire
SavvyCal
MicroAcquire
Quiet Light Brokerage
Derrick Reimer (@derrickreimer) | Twitter
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from Google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/9/2021 • 43 minutes, 24 seconds
Bonus Episode: The 2021 TinySeed Batch Announcement
TinySeed, MicroConf's venture fund and SaaS accelerator, is launching their Fall 2021 accelerator batch this week.
11/4/2021 • 17 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 574 | The Deep Need to Be a Software Entrepreneur
In Episode 574, Rob Walling chats with Andrew Fiebert, a founder who just couldn't get away from software. He's a software developer, turned podcaster, turned marketer, and now he's a software entrepreneur and on this episode, they discuss his success and struggles while building Lasso.
The topics we cover
[2:40] Introductions
[4:15] WordPress plugin with an annual subscription
[5:51] Starting a podcast
[8:00] Experiments with monetizing a podcast
[13:26] Starting Giftlab.co
[15:08] Starting another software business
[16:35] Building Lasso
[21:23] Launching without the right pricing/product
[23:32] Discovering the sticking points in the UI/UX
[29:29] Freemium vs paid users
[31:06] The biggest struggle with building Lasso
[35:23] The future for Lasso
Links from the show
Lasso
GiftLab
Listen Money Matters
Andrew Fiebert (@andyfieb) | Twitter
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from Google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/2/2021 • 38 minutes, 24 seconds
Bonus | The 2022 State of Independent SaaS Survey is Live
We need your help! The 2022 State of Independent SaaS Survey is now live and we need as many eligible founders of B2B SaaS businesses to complete the survey. This survey will be used to create our third annual State of Independent SaaS report, offering recommendations, insights, and pitfalls critical to planning for a future in B2B SaaS.
Venture funded businesses have a wealth of research and data helping them make decisions about the next steps they should take with their business - our community and niche of indie funded SaaS businesses shouldn't miss out on these best practices.
Fill out the 2022 State of Independent SaaS survey today!
microconf.com/state-of-indie-saas
11/1/2021 • 2 minutes, 6 seconds
Episode 573| Hiring FT vs. PT, WordPress Consolidation, and More Bootstrapper News
In Episode 573, Rob Walling chats with Einar Vollset and Tracy Osborne about the part-time contractor versus hiring full-time debate, the acquisition of Sandhills Development, as well as the launch of a TinySeed Europe.
The topics we cover
[02:14] FT vs PT Contractor
[09:06] When could part time contracting work?
[10:25] Sandhills Development acquisition
[14:50] TinySeed Europe announced
[21:04] DuckDuckGo and Privacy
Links from the show
Episode 551 | Task-level vs. Project-level Thinkers, No Such Thing as an Autopilot Business, and More (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Awesome Motive has acquired our WordPress products and services – Sandhills Development, LLC
Josh Pigford on Twitter Regarding FT vs PT Contractor
DuckDuckGo and Privacy
Careers — TinySeed
Invest — TinySeed
Tracy Osborne on Twitter
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | Twitter
This episode of Startups for the Rest of Us is sponsored by Software Promotions. Get better results from google.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/26/2021 • 27 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 572 | Fault vs. Responsibility & Games vs. Practice (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In Episode 572, Rob Walling does another solo adventure to talk about taking responsibility for the outcomes of your business and the importance of putting in the reps as a founder. Bootstrapping a startup is a marathon, not a sprint and it's important to enjoy the journey along the way.
Thanks to Software Promotions for supporting this podcast! Learn more about their SEO and AdWords services
The topics we cover
[1:56] Intro
[2:20] It's not your fault, but it's your responsibility
[8:35] It's not the game, it's the practice
[15:23] Dietary patterns Rob wishes he would've known 15 years ago
Links from the show
Episode 551 | Task-level vs. Project-level Thinkers, No Such Thing as an Autopilot Business, and More (A Rob Solo Adventure)
11 Years to Overnight Success: From Beach Towels to A Successful Exit – Rob Walling – MicroConf 2017
Thanks to Software Promotions for supporting this podcast! Learn more about their SEO and AdWords services
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/19/2021 • 24 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 571 | Deciding When to Move on to Your Next Idea
In Episode 571, Rob Walling chats with Peter Suhm about moving on from WP Pusher and Branch. We also dive into how he came up with the idea for Reform and his process for validating the idea with a landing page before building.
The topics we cover
[1:28] Intros
[2:48] Default alive and selling Branch
[8:15] Changing customer behavior is hard
[12:25] Struggling through customer interviews from a small studio
[16:20] Thinking through all the options and deciding to keep going
[18:45] Moving from a list of requirements to a form builder
[27:23] Building a high-quality MVP, starting with a landing page
[34:52] Entering a big, horizontal, crowded space
Links from the show
Branch - Automated deployments for WordPress
Reform - Hosted forms. No code required.
Start Small, Stay Small
Obviously Awesome - How to Nail Product Positioning so Customers Get it, Buy it, Love it
Peter Suhm (@petersuhm) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/12/2021 • 38 minutes, 2 seconds
Episode 570 | Bootstrappable Businesses, Selling as an Introvert, and More Listener Questions
In Episode 570, Rob Walling answers listener questions about the ideal business for bootstrapping, how to create trust with potential customers, navigating depression as an entrepreneur as well as advice for introverted founders.
The topics we cover
[1:42] Problems that are more conducive to bootstrapping
[8:51] Creating trust with potential customers
[10:51] Battling depression or mental illness as an entrepreneur
[13:45] Advice for introverted founders
[18:95] Standard operating agreement for co-founders
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/5/2021 • 23 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode 569 | The Life Changing Decision of When to Sell Your Company
In Episode 569, Rob Walling chats with Anna Maste, a founder who's been a part of the MicroConf community for several years. They talk about how Anna bootstrapped a two-sided RV marketplace and eventually sold it for a healthy multiple.
The topics we cover
[1:16] An RV boondocker
[2:53] Selling for a healthy multiple
[5:21 ] Building a business with a a family member
[7:02] Tech stack used
[8:23] Launching and early customers
[12:45] Experimenting with business models and pricing
[14:01] Inflection in growth
[18:21] Bootstrapping and fitting in
[23:53] First purchase offer
[28:05] Accepting the second strategic offer
Links from the show
Boondockers Welcome
Anna Maste (@skulegirl) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/28/2021 • 32 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 568 | MailChimp Sells for $12 billion
In Episode 568, Rob Walling talks about MailChimp selling for $12 billion to Intuit, the largest exit for a bootstrap company, ever. Not that all founders aspire to grow to this scale, but it's truly an incredible day for bootstrapped founders to know that we have the potential to get to this level without raising institutional funding.
The topics we cover
[1:41] $800 million in ARR without outside funding
[4:14] Acquisition multiple
[7:42] Everyone sells, eventually
[9:31] Respect for MailChimp
[11:49] Disappointed with the UX
[13:21] Equity vs higher salaries and bonuses
[18:00] Long term outlook for existing Mailchimp customers
[21:21] Never say you're never going to sell
[21:42] Being an email service provider today is hard
Links from the show
Episode 519 | Profit Sharing, Stock Options, and Equity (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Rob Walling (@robwalling) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/21/2021 • 26 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 567 | From Developer to CTO to Buying the Company for $1
In Episode 567, Rob Walling chats with Don Pottinger about joining a company as a developer, transitioning to CTO within 6 months, buying the company for $1, and then later on selling it for a life-changing sum of money.
The topics we cover
[1:13] Introductions
[4:08] Learning to code independently vs learning on the job
[06:38] Joining Kevy in 2014
[8:00] Transitioning to Director of Engineering and then to CTO
[11:58] Difficulty of laying employees off
[14:20] A new CEO and $0 MRR
[16:08] Cap table difficulties
[19:56] CEO departure and buying the company for $1
[26:30] Starting over and doing it solo
[29:01] Running as a lifestyle business and selling the company
[35:02] Launching a new startup
Links from the show
Kevy
Langua Talk
Don Pottinger (@donpottinger) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/14/2021 • 39 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode 566 | From Bootstrapped to Venture Backed with Hana Mohan
In Episode 566, Rob Walling chats with Hana Mohan about her journey as a SaaS founder. They compare and contrast bootstrapping and being venture-backed, hiring a chief of staff early on as a startup founder, and more.
The topics we cover
[2:17] Intro
[3:36] Deciding not to bootstrap MagicBell
[6:34] The team Composition at MagicBell
[9:15] The marketing approaches that are working today.
[10:47] Technology behind MagicBell
[19:32] Bootstrapping vs raising funding
[24:24] The importance of finding the right investors and hiring the right people
[25:27] Hiring a Chief of Staff
Links from the show
Starting a new tech business as a transgender woman
From Bootstrapped to Venture-Backed with Hana Mohan
Hana Mohan (@unamashana) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/7/2021 • 33 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode 565 | Correlation vs. Causation, Focus, Sharing MRR, and More Listener Questions
In Episode 565, Rob Walling answers listener questions about focusing on one product vs multiple, sharing revenue metrics with early employees, and how to overcome the lack of motivation when starting new projects.
The topics we cover
[05:31] Focusing on one core product vs multiple separate products at the same time
[14:59] Sharing revenue metrics with new employees
[18:37] Struggling with motivation and consistency
Links from the show
Cargo cult
1 simple rule to figure out which advice you should follow
Episode 559 | Bootstrapping a Two-Sided Marketplace with MicroAquire
Rob Walling (@robwalling) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/31/2021 • 26 minutes, 4 seconds
Episode 564 | Running a Business with 10,000 Paid Subscribers
In Episode 564, Rob Walling chats with Sol Orwell about growing his website, examine.com to millions of views per month, changing revenue models, and the importance of doing customer interviews.
The topics we cover
[2:14] Intro
[3:06] How Examine started
[7:21] Examine's differentiated approach based on scientific research
[9:33] 10,000 paying subscribers
[10:59] Building trust through transparency
[15:26] Interviewing customers
[21:14] Getting hit by Google
[26:52] Sol's stunt marketing pages
Links from the show
Our Mistakes | GiveWell
Examine
SJO.com
Sol Orwell (@sol_orwell) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/24/2021 • 33 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 563 | The Struggle, Calls to Action, Selling Above $1M ARR, and More Listener Questions
In Episode 563, Rob Walling answers listener questions about startup operating agreements for co-founders, common cloud hosting solutions, struggling as a young entrepreneur, and selling your startup when you have over $1M in annual recurring revenue.
The topics we cover
[1:40] Operating agreements for startup co-founders
[5:50] How to do startup vesting when not working fulltime on a project
[9:41] Common cloud hosting solutions for startups
[11:04] Struggling as a young entrepreneur
[18:20] Call to action for info product
[20:54] Virtual assistance
[23:05] Selling above $1M ARR
Links from the show
LegalZoom
Rocket Laywer
Upcounsel
Start Small, Stay Small
Upwork
Best Jobs
Virtual Staff Finder
Rob Walling (@robwalling) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/17/2021 • 28 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode 562.5 | TinySeed Fall 2021 SaaS Accelerator Application Info Session
The application for TinySeed’s Fall 2021 SaaS accelerator batch of startups will open for two weeks starting on August 9th, 2021.
Watch the video recording of the Fall 2021 Batch Info Session here: https://youtu.be/6dqTClonO2Y
Interested in applying? Join us for an info session with the TinySeed team to talk about the application process, what to expect as a member of TinySeed, and some of the things we are looking for in companies we welcome into the fold.
https://tinyseed.com
#tinyseed
We’ve written a few posts that might be helpful if you’re considering applying:
— Our Fall 2021 application announcement: https://tinyseed.com/latest/tinyseeds-fall-2021-application-announcement
— Preview our Fall 2021 application and requirements in this overview: https://tinyseed.com/latest/2021-application-preview
— Curious about what it's like being a TinySeed founder?
Part 1 - https://tinyseed.com/latest/whats-it-like-being-a-tinyseed-founder
Part 2 - https://tinyseed.com/latest/part-2-tinyseed-founder
8/16/2021 • 1 hour, 3 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode 562 | "Measure Twice, Cut Once" + SaaS Holy Grails (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In Episode 562, join Rob Walling for another solo adventure to talk about enterprise sales, mental frameworks for founders, undoable decisions, and how to handle being approached about an acquisition.
The topics we cover
[2:33] Enterprise sales advice
[5:48] Measure twice, cut once for SaaS
[10:56] Holy Grail of SaaS: Expansion Revenue
[13:12] Holy Grail of SaaS: Virality
[14:25] Holy Grail of SaaS: Big space with slow-moving incumbents
[15:46] Things to keep in mind when being approached about an acquisition
Links from the show
Josh Ledgard on Twitter
Rob Walling (@robwalling) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/10/2021 • 19 minutes, 29 seconds
Episode 561 | Launching on Product Hunt and DIY vs. DFY
In Episode 561, Rob Walling chats with Andy Cabasso, co-founder of Postaga, about launching on Product Hunt, having a done-for-you service in addition to a DIY self-service SaaS app, growing to a team of six people, having a free plan, and doing a ton of customer development in the early days.
The topics we cover
[01:35] Selling an agency with retainers to start Postaga
[03:46] Explaining Postaga simply and succintly
[06:32] Size and stage of Postaga
[07:24] Using Postaga to market Postaga
[10:22] Learning from early users
[13:56] Launching on Product Hunt
[18:09] Was it worth it to launch on Product Hunt?
[20:30] Not charging at launch
[22:22] Conjecturing on a Product Hunt flop
[23:26] Postaga pricing plans
[25:58] A big month of growth
[32:13] A SaaS product with a service component
Links from the show
Postaga | Automated Post Promotion and Marketing Platform
Andy Cabasso (@andycabasso) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/3/2021 • 36 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 560 | When to Hire, Square Business Banking, and More Bootstrapper News
In Episode 560, Rob Walling is joined by Einar Vollset and Tracy Osborn to talk about deciding when it's time to hire someone, how to think about which role to hire next, changing location to force productivity, and more.
The topics we cover
[2:52] Deciding to hire a community manager
[9:28] Location hacks for improved productivity
[14:52] Delta airline pilot suing Delta for stealing app
[20:35] Product → Business → Company
[27:18] Facebook Users say "No" and Advertisers are Panicking
[32:32] Tech-enabled modern banks
Links from the show
MicroConf Remote Community Manager
Tracy Osborn's Tweet on Location Hacking
Delta pilot sues the airline for allegedly stealing an app he designed | Engadget
Rob Walling's Tweet on Product → Business → Company
FacebookUsers Said No to Tracking. Now Advertisers are Panicking
Square Business Banking | Checking, Savings, & Loans
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/27/2021 • 38 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode 559 | Bootstrapping a Two-Sided Marketplace with MicroAquire
In Episode 559, Rob Walling chats with Andrew Gazdecki, the founder of MicroAcquire, about bootstrapping a two-sided marketplace in a competitive industry. They talk about Andrew's previous successes, including growing Bizness Apps to $10 million in annual recurring revenue. They also unpack Andrew's current business, MicroAcquire, and talk about how it was started, its current success, and the future plans for the business.
The topics we cover
[6:03] Why did Andrew decide to sell Bizness
[8:12] Background on MicroAcquire
[10:52] Ideal revenue for MicroAcquire
[13:29] Comparing MicroAcquire differs from similar broker websites
[16:59] The future of MicroAcquire
[20:50] Metrics since launching in January 2020
[23:08] Bootstrapping a two-sided marketplace
[26:33] Raising $22 million post-money valuation
[31:25] The hardest thing about bootstrapping a business
Links from the show
MicroAcquire
Bizness Apps
Andrew Gazdecki (@agazdecki) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/20/2021 • 34 minutes, 2 seconds
Episode 558 | Thinking Through Funding as a Bootstrapper
In Episode 558, Rob Walling chats with Einar Vollset about bootstrapping versus funding and the many options that exist in between. No longer is it a decision between a bootstrapped or venture path. With their unique perspectives, Rob and Einar talk about all of the funding options that exist. They also share some things to consider when deciding whether or not to take on funding and, if you do, how much you should plan on raising.
The topics we cover
[04:24] When funding makes sense for bootstrappers
[11:54] Raising pre-revenue vs raising with revenue
[15:29] Risks of raising as a platform (e.g. Shopify) business
[20:40] Funding options available to bootstrappers
[27:57] Convertible notes & SAFE's
[29:16] How much should a bootstrapper raise?
Links from the show
Episode 496 | "The Press Covers Exceptions, Don't Compare Yourself to Slack or Zoom"
Episode 411 | Bootstrapping vs. Funding: 19 Questions To Ask
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/13/2021 • 43 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 557 | Investing for Founders
In Episode 557, Rob Walling flies solo to talk about investing for founders, with an emphasis on retirement. Rob views investing as a long-term game, not treating the stock market like a slot machine by buying and selling stocks. As founders, we're busy with our work, our family, and our friends. We don't want to spend a ton of time fiddling with investments. In this episode, Rob outlines an 80/20 approach to getting the most out of investing as a founder.
The topics we cover
[02:13] How Rob made most of his money
[04:07] The rule of 72
[07:30] Investing on autopilot while building startups
[07:46] Build an emergency fund
[09:53] Max out retirement plans
[12:08] Open a simple IRA or SEP IRA
[13:00] Life insurance
[14:35] Retirement account asset allocation
[18:32] Taking your investments to the next step
Links from the show
Rule of 72
Haven Life
Lazy Portfolio
Money For the Rest of Us
The Stacking Benjamins Podcast
Afford Anything
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/6/2021 • 25 minutes, 39 seconds
Episode 556 | Zero to $26k MRR as the Solo Founder of Rails Autoscale
In Episode 556, Rob Walling chats with Adam McCrea about growing from zero to $300,000 in ARR over the course of three years as a Heroku add-on. Adam is still a single founder with no employees and up until joining the TinySeed accelerator in their Spring 2021 batch, has fully bootstrapped Rails Autoscale. Now, he's working to grow the app, deal with platform risk, and launch pricing experiments.
The topics we cover
[03:30] Background before starting Rails Autoscale
[07:04] Getting to 100 active users
[09:30] Platform risk
[14:59] Working on Rails Autoscale as a side project
[20:54] Rails Autoscale vs. Heroku's Autoscaler
[24:13] Free-trial to freemium experiment
Links from the show
Rails Autoscale
Adam McCrea (@adamlogic) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/29/2021 • 28 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode 555 | Businesses You Can Bootstrap, W2 vs. Contract, Enterprise Pricing, and More Listener Questions with Ruben Gamez
In Episode 555, Rob Walling answers listener questions with Ruben Gamez. They discuss different models of bootstrapping success, hiring W2 versus hiring contractors, determining if a business is an ideal fit for bootstrapping and they revisit enterprise pricing.
The topics we cover
[01:24] Bootstrappers Rob & Ruben admire
[12:25] Pros and cons to hiring contractors vs W2 employees
[23:05] Determining if an idea is a good fit for bootstrapping
[28:31] How to develop competitive pricing for large enterprise clients
Links from the show
Moraware
CartHook
Balsamiq
Churn Buster
SparkToro
Bidsketch
Episode 551 | Task-level vs. Project-level Thinkers, No Such Thing as an Autopilot Business, and More (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Ruben Gamez (@earthlingworks) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/22/2021 • 36 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 554 | Thinking Through Your Exit + Grief and Entrepreneurship with Dr. Sherry Walling
In Episode 554, Rob Walling chats with Sherry Walling about grief as a part of entrepreneurship and how to get better at handling grief as an entrepreneur. They also discuss burnout and properly evaluating if it's the right time to sell a company.
The topics we cover
[02:18] Grief is part of entrepreneurship
[05:12] Getting better at handling grief and loss
[06:07] Grief and selling a company
[09:01] The importance of symbols
[12:04] Evaluating reasons to sell a company
[16:37] The three components of burnout
[20:21] Changing your work schedule for summer
Links from the show
The Entrepreneur’s Guide to Keeping Your Sh*t Together: How to Run Your Business Without Letting it Run You
18 Summers
ZenFounder
Sherry Walling
Sherry Walling (@zenfounder) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/15/2021 • 26 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode 553 | Stack Overflow and Moz Acquired, Quitting Instead of Giving Up Remote Work, and More Bootstrapper News
In Episode 553, Rob Walling chats with Tracy Osborn about the latest bootstrapper news, including the recent Stack Overflow and Moz acquisitions, quitting instead of giving up remote work, and highlights from TinySeed 2020 Batch.
The topics we cover
[01:52] Intro
[03:45] Stack Overflow acquisition
[12:11] Moz acquisition
[16:33] Quitting instead of giving up remote work
[26:44] Highlights from TinySeed 2020
Links from the show
Episode 545 | The Value of Learning 80/20 Design Fundamentals
Episode 511 | Raising Prices & Re-writing Your Codebase
Employees Are Quitting Instead of Giving Up Working From Home
Stack Overflow Sold to Tech Giant Prosus for $1.8 Billion
Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/8/2021 • 36 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 552 | Google Audits, Partnerships, and Freemium with Mike Taber
In Episode 552, Rob Walling is joined by co-host emeritus, Mike Taber to chat about his decision-making around whether to launch a freemium plan, whether to do an AppSumo deal, how his potential partnerships merger is panning out.
The topics we cover
[04:93] Update on the CRM partnership opportunity, AppSumo, and Freemium
[23:39] Yet another Google security audit update
Links from the show
Bluetick.io
Episode 535 | A Bluetick Update with Mike Taber
MicroConf Remote
Episode 543 | All Things Startup with #Mike Taber
Mike Taber (@singlefounder) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/1/2021 • 35 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 551 | Task-level vs. Project-level Thinkers, No Such Thing as an Autopilot Business, and More (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 551 of Startups For the Rest of Us, Rob does another solo adventure to talk about hiring owner-level thinkers, the fallacy of an autopilot passive income software business, and more.
The topics we cover
[1:25] Hiring task-level thinkers, project-level thinkers, and owner-level thinkers
[07:43] The fallacy of an autopilot passive income software business
[15:21] Our bootstrap community
[20:45] Questions you should ask yourself when building/growing a company
Links from the show
FE International: Professional M&A Advisor
Quiet Light Brokerage
MicroAcquire - Startup acquisition marketplace. Free. Private. No middlemen.
Empire Flippers - Website Brokers
Billion Dollar Loser: The Epic Rise and Spectacular Fall of Adam Neumann and WeWork
Invent and Wander: The Collected Writings of Jeff Bezos, With an Introduction by Walter Isaacson
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
This episode is sponsored by Rewardful, turning your biggest fans into your best marketers.
Get 30% off your first 3 months by heading to getRewardful.com/startups. Offer expires May 31st.
5/25/2021 • 28 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 550 | Three Years of Grind to Six Figures in ARR with CloudForecast
In Episode 550, Rob Walling chats with Tony Chan, co-founder of CloudForecast, about his incredible story of perseverance after getting rejected multiple times only to finally find product-market fit and reach six figures in annual recurring revenue.
The topics we cover
[04:11] CloudForecast's current revenue and customer base
[08:43] Origin story for the idea of CloudForecast
[16:53] Dealing with (many) rejections
[28:01] Parting ways with a co-founder
[30:07] The journey to Product-Market Fit
[35:23] Marketing channels that are working for CloudForecast
Links from the show
CloudForecast
Episode 464 | Highs, Lows, and Building Your First Sales Process with Steli Efti
Episode 507 | Making Cold Email Work in B2B SaaS
Episode 463 | Troubleshooting Enterprise Sales (A Founder Hotseat with David Heller)
The Only Sales Guide You'll Ever Need by Anthony Iannarino
Tony Chan (@toeknee123) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
This episode is sponsored by Rewardful, turning your biggest fans into your best marketers.
Get 30% off your first 3 months by heading to getRewardful.com/startups. Offer expires May 31st.
5/18/2021 • 43 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 549 | Hiring vs. Outsourcing, E-commerce SaaS, and More Listener Questions with Jordan Gal
In Episode 439, Rob Walling is joined by Jordan Gal to answer listener questions about starting an e-commerce SaaS and the laws and regulations, and compliance requirements required. They talk about managing enterprise perceptions of risk towards bootstrap startups. They also answer questions about bootstrapping and enterprise SaaS as well as hiring a growth role and whether you should hire full-time or outsource to a contractor or an agency.
The topics we cover
[01:11] Regulatory requirements for starting an e-commerce platform (Solman Ahmed)
[06:18] Managing enterprise perception of risk when selling as a bootstrapper (Noah Stall)
[16:26] Are some markets not feasible with a bootstrapped approach? (Declan Sweeney)
[22:42] Finding someone who is experienced growing SaaS companies (Russ)
[30:10] Hiring full-time versus outsourcing (Filip Kis)
Links from the show
Crossing the Chasm
DemandMaven || Growth Marketing Consultancy for SaaS & Startups
MicroConf Connect — MicroConf
Episode 537 | On Launching, Funding, and Growth with Serial SaaS Founder Rand Fishkin
Episode 499 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth - Part 1
Episode 499.5 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth - Part 2
Jordan Gal (@jordangal) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
This episode is sponsored by Rewardful, turning your biggest fans into your best marketers.
Get 30% off your first 3 months by heading to getRewardful.com/startups. Offer expires May 31st.
5/11/2021 • 41 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 548.5 | The Companies in TinySeed's Spring 2021 Batch
5/6/2021 • 7 minutes, 11 seconds
Episode 548 | The Grind of Building a SaaS During Nights & Weekends
In Episode 548, Rob Walling chats with Zack Naylor about Aurelius and the harrowing tale of launching multiple times and having to rewrite and re-platform the codebase before finally finding success. They also discuss how to interpret feedback from your customers and the importance of listening to your instinct as a founder.
The topics we cover
[03:24] Background on how Aurelius helps UX researchers
[07:56] The struggles of building and launching multiple alpha versions
[15:14] Bootstrapping during a pandemic
[22:20] Taking risks as an entrepreneur
[26:28] Building a third version of the product that lead to unprecedented growth
[30:48] Using your gut as a founder
Links from the show
Aurelius
Things You Should Never Do, Part I
Episode 541 | Faster Horses & Product Myths, Life-changing Money, Dual Funnels, and More
Zack Naylor (@zacknaylor) | Twitter
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
This episode is sponsored by Rewardful, turning your biggest fans into your best marketers. Get 30% off your first 3 months by heading to getRewardful.com/startups. Offer expires May 31st.
5/4/2021 • 37 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 547 | Private Podcasting, Apple's Announcement, and Accelerating Growth with Craig Hewitt
In Episode 547, Rob Walling chats with Craig Hewitt about private podcasting, Apple's announcement around their subscription podcast offering as well as the accelerating growth of Castos.
The topics we cover
[1:22] Focusing on private podcasting at Castos
[15:50] Mobile app for private podcasting
[20:21] Apple's big announcement
[28:08] Castos MRR growth
Links from the show
TinySeed Tales - Season 1
Seeking Scale
Trustshoring
Craig Hewitt (@thecraighewitt) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/27/2021 • 36 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 546 | Hiring Entrepreneurial People, Anonymity, Disruptive Innovation, and More Listener Questions
In Episode 546, Rob Walling flies solo for a Q&A episode. With a backlog of great listener questions, Rob discusses qualified small business stock (QSBS), hiring entrepreneurially-minded employees, indie hacking while working at a large company, and more.
The topics we cover
[01:51] Should I switch to a C Corp to take advantage of QSBS in five years?
[05:40] How to attract entrepreneurial employees
[14:19] Indie-hacking while working at a large Fortune 20 company
[19:12] Finding a niche using the Disruptive Innovation
Links from the show
Episode 442 | Corporate Structures and How the Choice You Make Now Can Impact You Years Down the Line
Episode 519 | Profit Sharing, Stock Options, and Equity (A Rob Solo Adventure)
The Stair Step Approach to Bootstrapping | Rob Walling - Serial Entrepreneur
Qualified Small Business Stock (QSBS)
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/20/2021 • 25 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode 545 | The Value of Learning 80/20 Design Fundamentals
In Episode 545, Rob Walling chats with Tracy Osborn about the importance of learning design fundamentals for startup founders. They also discuss her new book and the pros/cons of self-publishing vs working with a publisher.
The topics we cover
[00:52] Intros
[02:00] Deciding to self publish vs going with a publisher
[11:11] Design fundamentals for a startup founder
[16:23] Training your design eye
[18:57] The #1 thing to do to become a better designer
[20:01] Prototypes: the process of sketching ideas
Links from the show
Hello Web Design
No Starch Press
The 90-Minute Guide to Building Marketing Funnels That Convert (Data Beats Opinion)
Hello Web App
Sounds True
Tracy's Savy Call breakdown
Balsamiq
Sketch
UX Pin
Tailwinds
Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/13/2021 • 27 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode 544 | Annual Raises, Finding Good Startup People, and More Listener Questions with Josh Pigford
In this episode, Rob Walling is joined by Josh Pigford to answer listener questions, covering topics like annual pay increases, B2B SaaS price increases, white-label vs branded product, and hiring startup-minded people.
The topics we cover
[03:04] Building Maybe, and Rob busts Josh's chops about starting a business so soon
[10:02] Question #1: Annual Raises - Anonymous
[18:24] Question #2: Explaining a Price Increase - Steve McLeod Bootstrap FM
[23:11] Question #3: Free or Discounted Plans in Exchange for Branding - Adam Wohlberg
[29:28] Question #4: Finding startup people to hire - Anonymous
Links from the show
maybe
Transparent Salaries | Buffer
Radford | Compensation Surveys
Episode 537 | On Launching, Funding, and Growth with Serial SaaS Founder Rand Fishkin
Parachute List
We Work Remotely
Authentic Jobs
Dynamite Jobs
Josh Pigford (@Shpigford) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/6/2021 • 46 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode 543 | All Things Startup with #Mike Taber
In Episode 543 of Startups For the Rest of Us, Rob is joined again by co-host emeritus, Mike Taber as he gives an update on all things startups and they analyze top tactics for superhero success.
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
4/1/2021 • 12 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 542 | 10x in Two Years, Past $3M ARR with SquadCast
In episode 542, Rob Walling chats with Zach Moreno, the Co-Founder and CEO of Squadcast about how they grew their revenue and surpassed $3 million in ARR as a mostly bootstrapped startup. They also discuss the role and importance of having a co-founder, as well as the impact that having a "knowledge investor" had on their success.
The topics we cover
[04:18] Squadcast growth while entering into a crowded space
[16:54] The importance of having a co-founder
[22:43] The shelter in place inflection point and building out video functionality
[34:08] Choosing a knowledge investor
Links from the show
Squadcast
Zencastr
SavvyCal
Why we believe something: The quality of audio matters
Rockwell Felder - Twitter
Zachariah Moreno (@zach__moreno) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/30/2021 • 47 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 541 | Faster Horses & Product Myths, Life-changing Money, Dual Funnels, and More
In episode 541, Rob Walling flies solo to discuss things like product myths and the misinterpreted Henry Ford quote, selling a company, defining life-changing money, and dual funnels.
The topics we cover
[02:48] Product myths and the misinterpreted Henry Ford quote
[07:21] Post-exit thoughts
[15:32] Life-changing money
[22:30] The power of dual-funnels
Links from the show
Becoming Steve Jobs: The Evolution of a Reckless Upstart into a Visionary Leader
Rob Walling - Mailing List
Episode 510 | The Story of Startups.com
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/23/2021 • 26 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 540 | Bootstrapper News. Twitter Spaces, Indie.vc Closing, Shopify, and More
In this episode, Rob talks with Tracy Osborn and Einar Vollset, about the recent news that's come out in the bootstrapper community. They talk about the Indie.vc shutdown, the new features coming out on Twitter, LinkedIn’s new gig marketplace, and more.
The topics we cover
[03:18] Twitter Spaces
[10:05] The Network Effect and Twitter Verification
[14:32] The Indie.vc shutdown
[24:20] Shopify removing the option to work directly with Stripe
[32:34] The new ‘Super Follow’ feature in Twitter
[35:43] Comparing Google Cloud and AWS onboarding
[40:04] The new LinkedIn Gig Marketplace
Links from the show
TinySeed
Tinyseed Thesis
Remail
Voxer
Shopify says remove Stripe billing or get booted from their app store
Substack
Indie.vc
Google Cloud vs AWS onboarding
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/16/2021 • 47 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode 539 | Post-Exit Life, Writing Six Books, and Brewing Beer with Dan Norris
In this episode, Rob chats with Dan Norris about selling his productized service to GoDaddy, his latest book, and latest business, a very successful brewery in Australia. They also ruminate on the impact that post-exit money has had on their lives.
The topics we cover
[07:04] Finding the motivation to write 6 books
[07:38] Selling WP Curve to GoDaddy
[18:11] Compound Marketing and applying the principles to Black Hops
[33:53] Life post-exit and the arrival fallacy
[45:57] Rob and the sale of Drip
[53:37] Building a SaaS to sell vs as a long-term, profitable company
Links from the show
Episode 183 | 5 Startup Rules to Live By with Dan Norris
The 7 Day Startup
Compound book
Black Hops Brewing - Gold Coast Craft Beer Brewery
State of Independent SaaS Report 2021 — MicroConf - The Most Trusted Community for Non-Venture Track SaaS Founders
Dan Norris (@thedannorris) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/9/2021 • 1 hour, 3 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode 538 | When to Sunset a Product, Enterprise Security Assessments, Lifetime Deals, and More Listener Questions
In this episode, Rob Walling is joined by Einar Vollset as they answer listener questions ranging from when to sunset a product, filling out enterprise security assessments, acquiring a company where the previous owner had sold lifetime deals and not disclosed it, and more.
The topics we cover
[03:20] Deciding when to sunset a feature or product
[08:27] Splitting a business to focus on two separate audiences
[17:21] How to take advantage of being a consumer of your own product.
[21:35] Acquiring a SaaS where the previous founder sold lifetime plans
[28:20] Enterprise security assessments
[35:22] Building a product to solve a problem as a full-time employee
Links from the show
TinySeed Tales S2E1 | Introducing Gather
Episode 515 | Finding a Co-Founder, Getting Better at Sales, and More Listener Questions
Episode 9: Raising Entrepreneurial Kids - ZenFounder
SOC 2
Episode 463 | Troubleshooting Enterprise Sales (A Founder Hotseat with David Heller)
The TinySeed Investment Thesis — TinySeed: The Startup Accelerator for Bootstrappers
Einar Vollset (@einarvollset) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
3/2/2021 • 41 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 537 | On Launching, Funding, and Growth with Serial SaaS Founder Rand Fishkin
In this episode, Rob is joined by Rand Fishkin for an honest and transparent conversation about his time at Moz, raising funding, his book Lost and Founder, as well as his current effort, SparkToro. They discuss growth levers and the importance of owning the channel where you build your audience.
The topics we cover
[01:44] Impacts from writing a book
[08:41] Transitioning from Moz but continuing to work there
[15:53] Venture capital vs angel investing
[19:59] Launching SparkToro
[36:08] Raising capital for SparkToro
[44:14] Growth levers that are working today
Links from the show
Lost & Founder
Start Small, Stay Small
Rand Fishkin's Bio
Sarah Bird
Startups.com
Zirtual
Clarity — On Demand Business Advice
SparkToro
Spark Toro Terms
Conversion Rate Experts
Rand Fishkin (@randfish) | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/23/2021 • 52 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode 536 | A Few Things I Learned in 2020 (A Rob Solo Adventure)
In episode 536 of Startups For the Rest of Us, Rob does another solo adventure. As we all faced perhaps one of the worst years on record, Rob talks through some things that 2020 taught him personally, professionally, and at a higher level, philosophically. He also looks beyond 2020 and discusses opportunities for 2021 for software entrepreneurs.
The topics we cover
[01:53] Keeping perspective during difficult startup times
[04:03] We can make it through scary and dangerous moments
[07:04] There is always opportunity
[09:53] Doing things in public creates opportunity
[12:02] Growing niches/industries in 2021
[18:31] In search of problems
Links from the show
Episode 490 | How Founders Should Be Thinking About the Current Crisis
Dynamite Jobs
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/16/2021 • 23 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode 535 | A Bluetick Update with Mike Taber
In Episode 535, Rob is joined by co-host emeritus, Mike Taber to talk about what Mike has been up to over the past seven months with Bluetick, including an exciting reveal of a big project he's been working on.
The topics we cover
[05:41] BlueTick partnership or merger with a CRM for field sales reps
[11:52] Delays in partnerships from pandemic and potential asymmetric upside
[15:42] How far along the CRM software compared to BlueTick?
[19:32] Considering freemium and an AppSumo deal
[32:48] Another Google security audit
Links from the show
SonarCloud (mentioned at 17:43)
Episode 484 | Marketing That’s Working Today, Moving from 5 to 10 Employees, SaaS Longevity, and More Listener Questions (mentioned at 22:28)
AppSumo
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/9/2021 • 38 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 534 | A $4M Exit with Josh Pigford of Baremetrics
In this episode, Rob talks with Josh Pigford in a first appearance since the sale of Baremetrics for $4m. They discuss his seven-year journey to build Baremetrics, the details of the sale, and Josh's post-sale, non-software aspirations.
The topics we cover
[02:42] Intros
[04:26] Avoiding capital gains via qualified small business stock.
[09:08] Josh's post-sale purchases and other dramatic life shifts
[13:46] Changes at Baremetrics after sale
[18:32] Weeks of cash to profitable in 8 months
[23:20] Breaking through plateaus and product vs marketing for growth out of plateaus
[30:13] What motivated Josh to start thinking about selling
[32:58] Launching a new feature called Intros in 2020
[39:11] Laser tweets and post-sale aspirations
Links from the show
Episode 244 | Competition, Transparency and Funding with Baremetrics Founder Josh Pigford
Baremetrics: Subscription Analytics & Insights for Stripe, Braintree, Recurly & more!
I sold Baremetrics - Baremetrics
Qualified Small Business Stock (QSBS) (mentioned at 04:26)
Four Percent Rule
How we went from weeks of cash left in the bank to profitable in 8 months (mentioned at 18:42)
Revenue Dashboard - Baremetrics Demo
I almost sold Baremetrics for $5m - Baremetrics
Laser Tweets: Wooden Laser Etched Tweets
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
2/2/2021 • 46 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode 533: Life Profitability After Two Exits (with Adii Pienaar)
In this episode, Rob speaks with Adii Pienaar, a multi-time founder with multiple exits under his belt. They discuss life probability and the importance of measuring your entrepreneurial success by the things that matter the most to you and your life.
The topics we cover
[4:36] What motivated Adii to write the book
[10:17] Life probability defined
[12:45] Work-life balance is not the solution
[29:21] Choosing to go back into the SaaS trenches
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/26/2021 • 37 minutes, 15 seconds
Episode 532 | The Art of Selling Your Business with John Warrillow
In this episode, Rob sits down with John Warrillow, author of multiple bestselling books and someone who has years of experience in building and selling companies. They discuss when to sell, how to create leverage, the importance of hiring an expert, and more.
The topics we cover
[7:30] The right time to sell a company
[15:06] Gaining leverage when negotiating
[20:59] Sell-side processes for founders
[29:14] The 5/20 rule
[31:41] Things to look out for from potential acquirers
Links from the show
The Art of Selling Your Business
Built to Sell: Creating a Business That Can Thrive Without You
Built to Sell Radio
The Automatic Customer: Creating a Subscription Business in Any Industry
Finish Big: How Great Entrepreneurs Exit Their Companies on Top
Before The Exit: Thought Experiments For Entrepreneurs
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/19/2021 • 40 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode 531 | How a Non-Technical Founder Grew Past $45k MRR
In Episode 531, Rob talks with Colin Gray, the founder of The Podcast Host and Alitu. Join us for this great conversation as we talk about Colin's early days of building a hobby project in podcast hosting, hiring a freelancer to start producing shows. and building a SaaS app on top of an audience.
The topics we cover
[7:05] Launching The Podcast Host
[16:10] Growing and launching eight businesses at once
[21:08] Making the switch to SaaS
[30:49] Temptations of shutting down vs. accelerating growth
Links from the show
The Podcast Host
Alitu
Hostile Worlds
Product/Founder Fit
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/12/2021 • 40 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 530 | Making Development Decisions, Regrets about Selling, and More Listener Questions (with Derrick Reimer)
In this week's episode, Rob sits down with Derrick Reimer to answer listener questions. They discuss whether they have any regrets about selling Drip, protecting against web scraping, making the leap from side project to full-time, and making decisions as a development team.
The topics we cover
[2:10] How development teams think about decisions together
[13:42] Do you ever regret selling Drip to Leadpages?
[21:00] Preventing against web scraping
[27:16] Jumping ship from a full-time job
[37:20] Advice on starting a mastermind group in 2021
Links from the show
The Mom Test
The Personal MBA
The Ultimate Sales Letter
Traction
The Entrepreneur’s Guide to Keeping Your Sh*t Together
Start Small Stay Small
The Art of Product
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
1/5/2021 • 47 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 529 | A Pricing Deep Dive with Slingshot
In this episode, Rob chats with John Howard, a MicroConf Connect member and founder of Slingshot. They unpack the business model of measurable swag giveaways and then dive deep into John's pricing strategy and explore alternatives as well as opportunities to move into a subscription-based model.
The topics we cover
[9:26] Starting a physical product business
[24:53] Previous pricing models
[30:48] Customer acquisition
[39:41] Removing setup fee or raising prices
Links from the show
Slingshot
Black Airplane
MicroConf Masterminds
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/29/2020 • 49 minutes, 1 second
Episode 528 | 2021 Predictions from Rob and Mike
In today's episode, Rob and Mike Taber review and rank their past yearly predictions and then make big, bold projections for 2021 with bets ranging from extraterrestrial life, VR becoming mainstream, the end of commercial real estate, and more.
The topics we cover
[2:45] Reviewing our predictions for 2019
[7:42] Predictions for 2021
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/22/2020 • 31 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 527 | From Agency to SaaS, Equity Splits, and More Listener Questions with Courtland Allen
In today's episode, Rob is joined by Courtland Allen as they answer listener questions. They talk about equity splits, the best cities for bootstrappers, splitting brands, and where to look for business ideas.
The topics we cover
[2:03] Splitting brands between agency and SaaS
[10:55] What percent equity split when co-founding an app
[18:52] Where to look for ideas
[31:02] Best city for bootstrappers
Links from the show
From $0 to $5M Without Writing Any Code with Tara Reed of Apps Without Code
Bootstrapping to $1 Million in Two Years as a Non-Technical Founder with Christy Laurence of Plann
Cities and Ambition
Tropical MBA podcast
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/15/2020 • 42 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode 526 | Launching, Learning, and Teaching with Justin Vincent
In episode 526 of Startups For the Rest of Us, Rob chats with a long-time friend, Justin Vincent about his startup successes and failures and the importance of taking small steps when starting as a founder. They also talk about Justin's latest project, Nugget, a startup bootcamp and academy.
The topics we cover
[4:04] Building Plugg.io
[10:30] Enthusiasm half-life
[16:03] Nugget Startup Academy
[25:54] Founder context
Links from the show
Techzing
Nugget
Plugg.io
Is it Keto?
Michael Lynch
Justin Vincent
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/8/2020 • 36 minutes, 37 seconds
Episode 525 | A Bootstrapping Artifact from 2005
This episode is a walk down memory lane as Rob shares the story of acquiring his first product 15 years ago. We hear how Rob navigated the purchase of the product, a potential partnership with a trusted friend, and pushing through when his back was against the wall.
Hopefully, this episode will inspire you to take action and keep shipping.
The topics we cover
[5:03] Three levels to making money online
[6:36] Discovering the original version of DotNetInvoice
[11:34] The business proposition
[15:10] The counteroffer from Rob's trusted friend
[18:41] Business plan vs boots on the ground
[20:49] Buying DotNetInvoice
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We’d love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
12/1/2020 • 27 minutes, 29 seconds
Episode 524 | Bootstrapping a Commodity SaaS
In this episode, Rob chats with Michele and Mathias Hansen, the married co-founders of Geocodio.
We talk about bootstrapping into a commoditized space and how they've grown their SaaS app from a side project to full-time over the past 6.5 years.
The topics we cover
[01:38] What is Geocodio?
[10:29] Innovating in a commoditized market
[16:07] How they defined their product roadmap
[18:06] Launching a HIPAA compliant enterprise pricing tier
Links from the show
Show HN: Ridiculously cheap bulk geocoding
Geocodio | Website
Geocodio | Website
Michele Hansen | Twitter
Mathias Hansen | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/24/2020 • 32 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 523 | Breaking Through Plateaus, Entrepreneurship for Kids, Common Bootstrapper Mistakes, and More Listener Questions
In episode 523, Rob hosts a rapid-fire lightning round of listener questions ranging from whether to focus on one or multiple businesses, finding the right amount of customer research, breaking through slow growth, and teaching entrepreneurship to kids.
The topics we cover
[4:38] If you were starting a business today and you were earlier on in your career, would you try multiple business ideas at once or go all-in on one?
[8:11] If building your first tiny product, like a WordPress plugin, what level of customer research should you do?
[10:56] What advice would you give to someone entering a somewhat competitive market?
[15:55] What questions would you be asking yourself if you had a slow-growing 12k MRR B2B SaaS?
[18:22] How would you go about offloading tier-one customer support?
[20:28] How do you feel about entrepreneurship being taught to children?
[22:24] What are things you noticed that bootstrappers commonly overlooked that are preventing them from achieving their goals?
[23:18] What are some of the biggest takeaways you can see across your portfolio of early-stage SaaS companies?
[25:01] Have you ever built a business that got a fairly large portion of its revenue from services instead of products, but not just you consulting?
[26:56] How do you prepare financially or otherwise for your retirement?
Links from the show
MicroConf Connect
SavvyCal
Stay on Top of Your SaaS Metrics: Know What to Measure to Maintain Sustainable Growth – Craig Hewitt
The 2020 State of Independent SaaS
ZenFounder
Indie Founder Bootcamp
AudienceOps
Castos Production (formerly Podcast Motor)
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
11/17/2020 • 29 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 522 | Revisiting Castos, One Year Later
Rob welcomes back to the show a frequent guest, Craig Hewitt for a "Where Are They Now?" syle episode. Craig is the founder of Castos and has appeared many times on Startups For the Rest of Us. In this episode, they reconnect and talk about the latest with Castos, from hiring a growth marketer, merging brands, private podcasting, and so much more.
The topics we cover
[3:54] Reflections on hiring a growth marketer 1 year later
[6:92] How did the free trial without asking for a credit card experiment work out?
[8:92] Merging brands and moving into enterprise offers
[19:91] Private podcasting
[23:44] What's new and exciting at Castos
Links from the show
Episode 466 | Answering Listener Questions With Craig Hewitt
Episode 493 | A Roundtable Discussion about COVID-19, Working From Home, Payroll Protection and More
TinySeed Tales - Season 1
Castos Productions (formerly Podcast Motor)
Rogue Startups
The SaaS Podcast Award
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/10/2020 • 44 minutes, 47 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E9 | Playing the Long Game
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
Join Rob as he chats with Brian & Scottie for the final episode of Season 2 of TinySeed Tales. In the last year, Gather managed to double their revenue and overcome most of the challenges they faced along the way.
It's been about a month since we last spoke and during that time, their recent cash crunch has started to resolve itself.
In this episode, we reflect on the past year and their success (and struggle) with moving upmarket.
The topics we cover
[01:01] Gather's recent cash crunch
Cashflow is not our biggest concern anymore, which is a great relief.
Since that time growth has been either sorta normal steady when you average it out or maybe a little slower the last month and a half.
Small Business Association loan and PPP loan changed things for us,.
One was the loans, the other was that Gather landed a bigger enterprise client who was willing to fund features and who was willing to put cash upfront for you to build them.
That allowed us to ramp our developer up from the part-time back to full-time, which was great.
[06:46] Looking forward a year from now
I think we're just going to have a much more well-rounded product.
I could easily see us doubling again, this coming year.
I feel like we've just been learning a lot about where we're lacking, what could be better, and what would be. More valuable or what to add.
[07:55] Did going upmarket save the business?
No doubt. Previous, smaller clients are very cost-sensitive.
With our larger firms, pricing doesn't seem to ever really come up. It's mostly about features.
We're not adding a ton of customers per month, but each one that we add they're worth more and we're just not turning out the smaller folks.
It was such a big gamble right at the start.
When you go upmarket, you can charge more and churn is going to tend to be lower Sales cycles will be longer, but people stick around longer. There's more loyalty.
We're excited about where those next five years are going to go because we think we're sort of just, even at the beginning of this journey, even though we're a bit into it already.
[14:56] Advice for early-stage SaaS founders
Relax into it. It doesn't mean that you can be complacent and that you can't pay attention, but just realize like you're on this path, you're on this journey and it's going to take however long it's going to take. It may not be the product that you're working on right now. Maybe the next one, it may be five products down the line, but whatever it is, it's just a matter of staying with it and being okay with the waves and roadblocks that come up around you and just go around them as gracefully as you can. Keep at it because the process is, for me, anyway, as much as the outcome.
Links from the show
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven't already, be sure to check out Season 1 of TinySeed Tales where we follow the Saas journey with Craig Hewitt of Castos.
11/5/2020 • 19 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode 521 | A Roundtable Discussion about a Potential Recession, Working from Home, Google Anti-trust, and More
Episode 521 is a roundtable episode where Rob brings on a couple of guests to talk through topics today that relate to bootstrapped and mostly bootstrapped startup founders.
Today, we have Tracy Osborn and Einar Vollset joining us, as we talk through a potential impending recession, the Google anti-trust suit, Dropbox moving to permanent work from home, as well as a handful of other topics.
The topics we cover
[04:03] What do the revenue trends look like in 6-7 months from now?
[13:36] Google anti-trust suit
[19:23] Dropbox remote offices
[27:29] SPACs and why it's so hard to go public in the US
[39:35] A warning about Glassdoor
Links from the show
The 99 Investor Problem
U.S. Accuses Google of Illegally Protecting Monopoly
Dropbox will let all employees work from home permanently as it turns its offices into WeWork-like 'collaborative spaces'
The TinySeed Investment Thesis
A Warning About Glassdoor
Tracy Osborn | Twitter
Einar Vollset | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
11/3/2020 • 47 minutes, 3 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E8 | Upmarket Starts to Pay Off
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
Last time we spoke, they were bouncing back from the initial shock of the COVID-19 crisis with the potential to sign two large enterprise deals that could help them out with an ongoing cash crunch.
In this episode, Rob talks with them about customer-funded development, always following up when doing outbound sales, and restarting a productized service.
The topics we cover
[01:14] Status on large enterprise deals
One closed, one did not.
The first touch with them was almost a year.
They had a software proprietary software that they built internally and have been actively seeking a new tool
Custom data migration and storage and it was also a bunch of custom development
Win-win they got what they wanted and we got some new cool features
Big win, I would say, to get paid, to build a feature that you expect other customers to be able to use.
Optimistic that maybe we can sort of like build the product that we want by closing these sorts of deals and move into the hospitality world
Referred to as customer-funded development
[06:51] Obstacles remain for moving upmarket
Outbound is not going as well as it used to.
Inbound has been fine. It's a little down this month over the previous.
Always be following up.
Never letting go until you're explicitly told to go away.
Making sure you never lose track of someone is like a huge win.
[10:03] Moving past uncertainty
There is still uncertainty. I think there's always that whether there's a pandemic or not. When you're first getting started and plugging along, there's always that kind of like tension, wondering how this month is going to be.
We have plenty of signals that people are willing to pay us quite a bit more than they were paying us.
When we started there, we were charging $29 or $39 a month, which in retrospect is just, you know, terrifying that we were priced that low.
If we can get to that traction where, you know, we are selling 10 new customers per month at the price points that we're doing right now like it's a game-changer.
[13:49] Restarting a services venture
Brian and Scotty decided to dip their toes into the world of services with a virtual coordinator that would complement their software.
The idea was to bring in some high-value clients and make some extra cash. And although they had to shelve it due to the COVID crisis, there's been some renewed interest.
Initially, we thought of the services side as a way to get some revenue fast.
This is pretty high touch services but finding a team to help with the services side. And then of course we'd be using the software. To also manage the services, which could potentially drive some of the features that we build for the software.
The most important piece and that is going to be the process of setting up SOP and figuring out how I can best. Manage the services side.
[19:23] Last week of TinySeed Tales
So much knowledge gained and relationships built. It was a great year.
I think not being able to meet in person in the year together feels like it's still, like, there's no closure.
It does feel just sort of finished, not finished.
Links from the show
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven't already
10/29/2020 • 25 minutes, 3 seconds
Episode 520 | Why a Million Dollar Agency Quit It All and Moved to SaaS
In this episode, Rob talks with the founder of SegMetrics, Keith Perhac. SegMetrics is a SaaS product that helps users get clarity on where their leads come from, how they act, and how much their marketing is worth.
We dive into the difference between SegMetrics and other options for attributing sales and revenue to traffic channels.
We also go through Keith's background and learn about why he shut down his million-dollar marketing agency to double down on his SaaS.
The topics we cover
[04:28] Where does SegMetrics fit within the analytics and attribute market?
[09:35] Why build a SaaS when you are running a 7 figure agency
[12:56] Dealing with a growth plateau
[21:28] Shifting focus to work on SegMetrics full-time
[28:05] Frugality as a bootstrapper (and how it can backfire)
Links from the show
SegMetrics | Twitter
SegMetrics | Website
Keith Perhac | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/27/2020 • 37 minutes, 36 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E7 | A Global Pandemic
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
Today's episode was recorded after the COVID-19 shelter in place orders went into effect. We talk with Brian and Scottie about how the pandemic has affected Gather as well as their life beyond the scope of their business.
The topics we cover
[01:10] How the pandemic has affected their lives beyond the scope of their business.
Brian and Scottie live in Mexico
Living in almost what feels like two worlds here. The ex-pat community is very tuned into what's happening in the US and sheltering in place
[03:11] Current financial situation
Our situation hasn't changed financially. I think that at the time we had hopes that we could raise some money or at least get alone. We're not even pursuing that at this point
We're certainly used to bootstrapping and feeling that stress and coming up with interesting solutions to our cash problems.
[05:57] High point or biggest wins since the last episode
We have had a couple of requests for enterprise plans, one existing customer that has a lot of data that they need to be migrated over and they have a custom feature that they want
Then a new customer who has a custom feature in data migration.
It's unexpected. Feasibly you think they're going to cut back expenses, but larger deals are coming your way.
The churn that we have had has been largely solo designers and smaller firms
One of the things of going upmarket, the typical pattern is there price sensitive, they churn less.
We've had a lot of inbound interest and a lot of them are saying things like now that we're home working remotely, we're sort of investigating better ways to work online
[09:21] Impacts from the COVID-19 crisis and biggest setbacks so far
Across the portfolio of companies that are part of TinySeed, there is about 15% that are having real struggles with the impact of the pandemic on the industry they serve. Another 70% are waiting to see what happens, perhaps cutting back on expenses and generally seeing a growth plateau. Then, there's the 15% of companies for whom remote work is a boon and their growth is accelerating faster than ever.
Gather has had to cut their developer contract in half
Big features are kind of on hold for a little while
Staying focused has just been difficult
[13:54] Fears and hopes for the future
I think my biggest fear is that the trend that we've seen this month as being a big uptick in sales and opportunities is just a flash in the pan.
In different times, we might be able to pivot if we needed to, but because of our financial situation it's going to be hard for us to pivot out of it
Looking forward to seeing how these enterprise deals play out
Trying to figure out ways that we could get customers to pay for some of the features that we'd like to build
Links from the show
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven't already, be sure to check out Season 1 of TinySeed Tales where we follow the Saas journey with Craig Hewitt of Castos.
10/22/2020 • 17 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode 519 | Profit Sharing, Stock Options, and Equity (A Rob Solo Adventure)
On this episode, Rob talks through profit sharing, stock options, and equity and makes a comparison between these various approaches.
If you are thinking of ways to incentivize team members as a bootstrapper, this episode is for you.
The topics we cover
[04:34] Bonuses
[07:52] Equity Grants
[11:47] Stock Options
[20:09] Profit Sharing
[26:09] Which is best for your SaaS?
Links from the show
Trends.vc
Peldi Guilizzoni's Profit-Sharing Plan
Rob Walling | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/20/2020 • 27 minutes, 12 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E6 | Best Growth Month Ever
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
On this episode, Brian and Scottie share with us an update on their unexpected MRR growth, the psychology of raising prices, and the difficulty of making decisions amidst a mountain of unknowns.
The topics we cover
01:07] Update on MRR growth since we last spoke
Had a goal to grow a thousand dollars of MRR in a single month.
Trailing 30 days is like $1,006.
MRR is currently $8,200.
Get caught up in the day to day to actually celebrate. Is good for us to stop and recognize that we have made a lot of progress.
We're still burning more cash than we're making.
[03:53] Closing a large 20-person enterprise deal
They did do a trial.
Then they bumped up to an enterprise plan.
You can have your sights set on a goal and before long you might achieve it. But that's not the end of your journey. You're onto the next hurdle.
This is one of the things I've found so difficult about starting this kind of company, your to do list is never clear and things don't end until you put someone in charge of the company or you sell it.
[05:47] Raising prices, again.
We've even raised twice.
Don't get a lot of price objections.
We have had to reject our previous customer avatar.
Lower prices send a bad signal to them.
The psychology of pricing, both at the founder level and also at the buyer level.
This is a tried and true SaaS playbook. You start at the bottom of the market because you don't have a brand and no one's heard of you and your product is really early, and you don't have the features that you need. You price yourself pretty low. You get a little bit of ttraction, use that to make a better product. You'll find your positioning. You learn more about the market, and then you just go up, up, up from there.
Lower price points, higher churn.
A lot of people don't realize product market fit is not just building a product that people want and are willing to pay for. It's also having a good idea about your positioning and pricing and some idea of channels where you can reach future customers.
You're making a lot of decisions quickly with incomplete information and you only know which ones work in retrospect.
[12:21] Biggest wins so far and looking to the future
In the beginning it felt a little bit scary and unknown when we were leaving, seeing the small teams.
Biggest win: validating with these larger teams.
Biggest win: we are selling into the kinds of firms that we hypothesized we could sell into.
Doing these sales over the last couple of months has just taught me how to sell.
[15:33] Biggest fear right now
That we're going to run out of money.
It's scary to see the bank account dwindle.
Just figuring out how we can keep going and keep growing and even accelerate growth.
How are we going to cross this bridge? Because we can see the green pastures on the other side.
Navigating a world that I don't quite understand yet should be the title and subtitle and every subheading of being an entrepreneur.
I'm most excited to see how we deal with this cash crunch that we're heading into.
Links from the show
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven't already, be sure to check out <a href="https://tinyseedtales.com/episodes/episode-1-a-non-techn
10/15/2020 • 20 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 518 | A Live LinkedIn Ads Consult with Anthony Blatner and Scatterspoke
Episode 518 of Startups For the Rest of Us is an experimental format where Anthony Blatner, a LinkedIn expert, live consults with John Samuelson, a B2B SaaS founder on advertising a SaaS business on LinkedIn.
There's a wealth of knowledge in today's episode so if you are considering or have thought about LinkedIn ads, this episode is worth a listen. We'd love your feedback on this new format. Was it helpful? Let us know in the comments or on Twitter (@startupspod)!
[BONUS] Download a LinkedIn campaign brief PDF developed during this episode
The topics we cover
[04:29] Should a B2B SaaS founder consider LinkedIn?
[07:33] Scatterspoke's ideal customer profile
[13:12] Ideal company size for Scatterspoke
[21:16] Looking at adds other companies are running
[24:43] Putting this together into a campaign
[30:36] Audience size and example ads
[36:19] Setting a budget for ads
[22:59] Free trials on LinkedIn
Links from the show
Episode 517 | Married Co-founders Who Turned a Free Tool Into a Fast-Growing SaaS Product
2021 State of Independent SaaS Survey
Modern Media
Scatterspoke
Scatterspoke,Modern Media | Twitter
Scatterspoke,Modern Media | Website
Anthony Blatner | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
10/13/2020 • 39 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 517.5 | The 2nd State of Independent SaaS Survey is Live
10/9/2020 • 1 minute, 41 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E5 | The Gamble of Raising Prices
On Episode 5 of TinySeed Tales, we learn about the success of their recent outbound email campaign. We also hear about their progress with raising their prices and transitioning away from Gather's solo pricing tier.
The topics we cover
[02:00] Checking in on the past few weeks
A little bit of an emotional roller coaster
We have definitely made some inroads with teams
We haven't had the growth that we were hoping for
Feeling a a little anxious about how it's all gonna play out.
There's a time here where it's very uncertain because you're kind of leaving the solo practitioners behind, but you haven't quite reached product market fit.
There's also a little bit of insecurity with the product
It's a huge mind shift all together selling into these teams
We were hoping for more of a spike and it's just been this slow, steady growth, which is not bad. It's growing as usual, but that's not helpful when you had to take all this risk
[05:51] Patience can be dangerous
Going forward Gather will be dropping their solar plan altogether.
Half of their signups in the last month have come from their new cold email outreach campaign that's focused on larger teams.
Had success from a customer development standpoint early on in the product before we ever even built anything. Brian was emailing tons of people and talking to them as much as I could
We actually had quite a bit of traffic last month but the conversion rate was half what we usually have, so it just speaks to the fact that we aren't speaking to the right people right now.
[07:31] Yet another pricing increase
Currently they offer a tier at $99 a month and one at $159 a month, as well as a custom enterprise plan. That's way up from $39 a month, which was their lowest price plan when they joined TinySeed.
My feeling is that price is not really an objection when we're selling to new people
It'll be interesting to see, you know, if we do start getting price objections from at least the solo people, we kind of predict that we will.
Next month we're planning on doing another potentially really big price jump.
Raising prices is increasing the speed of learning and if it works, although it's a big gamble, the payoff is pretty
In order to keep this up, like we would eventually need to hire some sales reps and some account executive types.
But when we move into this double triple price thing, you know, like into the, let's say $250 average revenue per customer, Then the whole model shifts and changes and it looks way more interesting.
[15:19] High points from last week
We did have to literally within five minutes of each other team annual signups. Both of them were from our cold email outreach and they had both had demos and that felt really good
We had an existing customer that's requested pricing for 20 teammates, so we provided a custom quote for them. But if they do decide to go ahead and sign on that, that will become our single largest customer, both in number of users in revenue as well.
Links from the show
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
10/8/2020 • 17 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode 517 | Married Co-founders Who Turned a Free Tool Into a Fast-Growing SaaS Product
We're joined in this episode by the founding team of Scatterspoke, John Samuelson and Colleen Johnson.
What started as a lark to learn new technology has now turned into a successful business with more than $12k MRR. In this episode, we learn how they turned a side project into a successful fulltime business.
The topics we cover
[02:09] The launch story behind Scatterspoke
[10:02] Shifting to enterprise customers
[16:17] The toll of working fulltime while trying to bootstrap Scatterspoke
[18:01] Hiring out for development
[26:00] Free plan and raising prices
Links from the show
Scatterspoke | Twitter
Scatterspoke | Website
Colleen Johnson | Twitter
10/6/2020 • 31 minutes, 29 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E4 | Being Married and Being Co-Founders
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
Today we're going to dive into the stress that comes with entrepreneurship and how it shows up in their personal lives. Moving up from one customer segment to another is hard. Each customer segment is like an Island with a body of water between them. They're crossing that body of water from servicing one and two-person teams to serving larger architecture firms with 20 person teams. We hear how they are managing this difficult and stressful moment both as co-founders and as married partners.
The topics we cover
[01:40] Leveraging testimonials when moving upmarket
It's an approach you should explore as early as possible when trying to move into a new segment of the market
One of the reasons why trials are kind of a little bit lower this month is because some of the traffic that we've been getting is probably more geared towards the residential side and they're seeing this new messaging.
You have two islands and a body of water in between them and its messaging and sales process and pricing and positioning and all that around going after one person, two-person teams versus a 10 person team and those are the two different islands.
[06:09] Cold email experiments to attract larger teams
Averaging 12-15 demos per week (initial goal was to get to 10)
Finding one repeatable channel at this stage is huge
Cold email has been the channel that has worked the best for Brian & Scottie
Most businesses that start B2C end up transitioning to B2B and end up raising prices. Means less churn, fewer flakes for demos, better conversion.'
Demo to trial isn't as high as they'd like it to be.
One reason for this could be due to the longer sales process
[11:27] Cashflow management
We had a really good month last month -- the best month we've ever had.
The biggest stress is just around the channels that we're investing in and wondering if they are going to perform like we want them to.
These are challenges with going upmarket. First, you have to figure out if you have product-market fit with teams. Then you have to find a channel or two that work. If the channel works, do the people stick around and can you find enough people who sign up and stick around? Can you find them fast enough with the channels you have such that you don't run out of cash
At the current burn rate we have about 6 months cash in the bank
If pushed, would consider debt-equity or debt financing as a fallback option
Founders do all sorts of things to maintain their runway, including credit card debt, personal loans, raising funding, even borrowing from their 401k. But with each of these, you have to weigh the risks to the business, as well as your personal financial situation.
[18:09] Dealing with stress as entrepreneurs and a married couple
The situation causes us to feel a little bit on edge and we have no one else to take it out on.
Now we're being much more conscious of our personal spending ad so I think that has also manifested itself just a little bit in some additional stress because we're really tracking all of our expenses really tightly and we're making sure that we don't spend foolishly.
No silver bullet for stress, but certainly meditation, exercise, and being aware that you are stressed.
Even though there is this sort of stress and there's sort of some existential risks to this experiment that we're running, it also feels aligned with where we want to go as a family and as an exit plan from work life at some point.
10/1/2020 • 24 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode 516 | When to Re-write Your SaaS Codebase
Matt Wensing returns for his third appearance on the podcast. He is the founder of Summit and was in TinySeed Batch 1.
We dive into Matt's decision-making process for re-writing the entire codebase. We talk about choosing the right features to build, talking to your customers, starting with a blank slate vs templates, and much more.
The topics we cover
[06:48] How to handle customers that are not engaging
[11:35] Figuring out the right features to build
[19:24] Making the decision to re-write the codebase
[31:27] The value of forecasting
[33:18] Designing a sparse SaaS homepage
Links from the show
Out of Beta
Things You Should Never Do, Part I
Episode 450 | Founder Hotseat: Matt Wensing of SimSaaS on Making Consistent, Needle-Moving Progress
Episode 491 | Hard Lessons Learned, Reaching High-Touch Prospects, Finding Advisors, and More Listener Questions
Episode 489 | 15 Years to a SaaS Exit (Plus Why Forecasting is Crucial)
Summit | Twitter
Summit | Website
Matt Wensing | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/29/2020 • 40 minutes, 35 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E3 | Is This All Worth It?
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
Today, Rob chats with Brian & Scottie about their new hires, setting ambitious revenue goals, and managing stress and anxiety as entrepreneurs.
The topics we cover
[01:01] Update on hiring, new sales, and more
Hired a VA
Hired an industry expert to help with marketing/copywriting
Scottie & Brian now focused on documenting the processes
Had their first "team plan" subscription
One thing you'll notice as an entrepreneur is that when you start to expand your team beyond just the founders, new hires, propel you to get more organized, creating standard operating procedures like Brian & Scottie are now doing is a big step towards cementing the continuity and value of the business.
[03:18] Attending the TinySeed retreat and setting ambitious revenue goals
Brian and Scottie attended their first in-person retreat for their TinySeed batch
Setting batch goals are less of a punitive thing and more of a "let's do this together and let's be ambitious together"
Once we started talking about specific numbers, it forces you to reevaluate how you are thinking about pricing
There are a number of levers that we have at our discretion to pull. That number gave us, like, it allowed me to think about the numbers that mattered the most and the ones that would provide the most leverage.
[13:13] Anxiety, stress, and entrepreneurs
We had a pretty high churn month
Because we are now starting to carve that path to that new type of customer, our features are no longer speaking to the other subset of customers
The fear is that this (churn) happens every month
Whether you're going upmarket, whether you're changing from one vertical to another, whether you're expanding into other verticals going from vertical to horizontal, there are all these changes you can make that are really scary while you're doing them.
It's important to look a few months ahead and imagine what it will look like if it succeeds
Links from the show
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven't already, be sure to check out Season 1 of TinySeed Tales where we follow the Saas journey with Craig Hewitt of Castos.
9/24/2020 • 26 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 515 | Finding a Co-Founder, Getting Better at Sales, and More Listener Questions
Rob is joined by Anthony Eden from DNSimple as they answer your listener questions.
They cover topics ranging from tax liabilities with contractors, getting feedback on a prototype, and finding a technical cofounder.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a SaaS that you’d like for us to cover, please submit your question for the next episode. We’d love to hear from you!
The topics we cover
[01:26] Tax liabilities and managing international contractors
[10:45] Starting when stair stepping isn't feasible
[16:38] Getting better at sales as a solo founder
[24:00] Finding a sales/marketing cofounder
[30:28] Getting feedback on a prototype, finding the right developer co-founder, and protecting your startup idea
[40:11] Considering a technical cofounder vs hiring a developer
Links from the show
Episode 509 | Revisiting the Six Stages of SaaS Growth with DNSimple
Intellectual Property Agreement
W-8BEN
Episode 498 | Selling During a Pandemic with Steli Efti
The Startup Chat with Steli & Hiten
Episode 507 | Making Cold Email Work in B2B SaaS
Indie Hackers
Activity Messenger
Jobs to be Done
DNSimple | Twitter
DNSimple | Website
Anthony Eden | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/22/2020 • 48 minutes, 1 second
TinySeed Tales S2E2 | Moving Upmarket
Brian & Scottie Elliott are the husband & wife co-founders of Gather, an interior design project management app.
On this episode, Rob chats with Brian & Scottie about taking their product upmarket, focusing on customer success, hiring consultants and contractors, and more!
The topics we cover
[01:43] Check in on how this week has been going
Setting things in motion with some new hires
MRR now growing off the chain but feeling good about accomplishments
Shifting focus from growing while also building out process
MRR growth is not everything
[04:50] Scottie talks about hiring
Looking at three potential hires right now: lead gen, VA, and an industry expert
Consultant vs contractor. A contract shows up and performs a task, a consultant is an expert in the industry
Moving from task-based hires to project-based hires
With Tinyseed funding now have the opportunity to do more hiring
[08:59] New business processes
Scottie was initially doing customer support
Now realizing needing to focus on customer success to help make sure the customer is successful
[10:21] Challenging sales cycles and losing an enterprise deal
Had a potential enterprise deal (40-50 seats) but the contract was pulled last minute based on the price
The contract eventually went to 0 and the client ghosted Scottie & Brian
Losing contracts is disappointing, but they'll continue to reach out until they get a "no".
Going to dig into the "why" to understand if it was pricing, or something else.
Founders need to decide between learning or hiring for specific skill sets
Important to have a sales process in place before handing off to an outsider
Lots of institutional knowledge within a business and sales process that needs to be documented
[17:57] Technical setbacks from the week
They had a complicated new feature about to ship when one of their developers raised an issue that ended up setting them back nearly a week.
Links from the show
TinySeed Tales Season 2 Episode 1
Gather | Website
Brian Elliott | Twitter
Thanks for listening to another episode of TinySeed Tales. If you haven't already, be sure to check out Season 1 of TinySeed Tales where we follow the SaaS journey with Craig Hewitt of Castos.
9/17/2020 • 21 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode 514 | An Inside Look at MicroConf Remote
Producer Xander Castro has been working on MicroConf since 2014 and is a long-time listener of the show, but this is his first time on the podcast.
On this episode, we take an inside look at MicroConf Remote from a few weeks ago and discuss what worked well, what we'll do differently next time and the difficulties of translating events from in-person to remote.
The topics we cover
[03:26] Turning to virtual events
[07:38] Stats & production technicalities for MicroConf Remote
[17:12] What worked well: pricing, timezones, and programming
[30:27] Things we learned from our first MicroConf Remote
Links from the show
MicroConf Remote
Xander Castro | Twitter
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/15/2020 • 39 minutes, 30 seconds
TinySeed Tales S2E1 | Introducing Gather
Welcome to Season 2 of TinySeed Tales, where we follow the founders of one SaaS startup week by week through their struggles, victories, and failures. On the first episode of this series, Rob introduces us to Brian & Scottie Elliott from Gather, an interior design project management app.
Show Notes
1:30 Meet the Co-Founders of Gather, Brian Elliott, and Scottie Elliott
Brian and Scottie have been working on Gather since late 2014
Scottie has 20+ years in the interior design industry
Brian was looking for software to build and continued to hear Scottie's frustrations with current software in the interior design industry
6:02 Gather's current Monthly Recurring Revenue (MRR) and why Brian & Scottie decided to join TinySeed
MRR is $5,600 with 8% growth
They were compelled by the three components of TinySeed (funding, mentorship, community)
As opposed to mastermind groups, everyone in TinySeed is serious about their business
They hadn't considered angel funding -- never felt like the right move. They wanted to continue to have control over their lifestyle.
Meeting with venture capitalists tends to make you want to raise venture capital
Bootstrapping doesn't have to be binary: either lifestyle or a moonshot startup.
There is a third option between bootstrapping and moonshots, but the third option doesn't preclude taking funding.
13:36 Do Brian & Scottie still feel like they are bootstrappers after taking funding?
All decisions are prioritized and based on being cost-effective
They're still protecting the downside risk
Going to continue to geo-arbitrage, and hire developers from developing countries
15:44 Biggest win of the week
Last week nearly doubled prices and had 2-3 new signups at that level. Good validation.
Raising prices is always a scary thing because you don't know what it's going to break
When they raised their prices, they grandfathered existing customers.
They want to reward their first customers for being early adopters
Churn can often, over time, take care of grandfathered customers
They over-index on relationships with users
19:54 Setback from the week
A majority of the trial signups would disappear without much activity on the product
Considering picking up the phone to call users to see why they didn't do anything on the product, but they also want to be respectful of the user's time.
Improve the quality of leads at top of the funnel to possibly help with trial signup engagement with the product
Often times, under the water for most startups, founders are kicking like a duck.
Brian is the optimist & Scottie balances things out.
So far, they've learned so much from building Gather that they will be happy with the outcome.
9/10/2020 • 28 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 513 | SaaS Valuations + Dos and Don'ts When Selling A SaaS
On today's episode of Startups For The Rest of Us, Rob Walling (@robwalling) talks with David Newell (@davidsnewell), a Senior Advisor at Quiet Light Brokerage, about the dos and dont's of SaaS valuations.
The topics we cover
4:12 Running your business as if it were a sellable asset
5:15 Quiet Light deal count and other stats
8:53 SaaS valuations today and how SDE valuations work
17:50 How revenue valuations work
21:19 David Newell shares stories of dos and donts of valuations
29:52 What do the best buyers do?
Links from the show
ProfitWell
ChartMogul
Baremetrics
Quiet Light
Summit
Resources for Buying and Selling Online Businesses
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/8/2020 • 34 minutes, 11 seconds
Episode 512 | The Power of Options (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Join us for a Rob Solo Adventure version of Startups for The Rest of Us as Rob Walling talks about the power of optionality. He explores the importance of having different paths and avoiding backing yourself into a corner and being constrained when making important life decisions.
The topics we cover
1:27 The story of Gary Gygax and Tactical Studies Rules (TSR)
6:56 The Entrepreneurmobile
13:00 How to keep your options open
17:33 DotNetInvoice and fake reduction of options
Links from the show
Tactical Studies Rules
Gary Gygax
Factoring
The Entrepreneurmobile
Episode 510 | The Story of Startups.com
Episode 496 | The Press Covers Exceptions, Don’t Compare Yourself to Slack or Zoom
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
9/1/2020 • 20 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode 511 | Raising Prices & Re-writing Your Codebase
Show Notes
On today's episode, Rob chats with Mike Ritchie about how they got their first paying customer in 30 days of launch, listening to your customers, and doing a massive pricing revamp.
SeekWell is looking for a freelance SEO marketer to help grow the top of their funnel. If you have experience in analytics and B2B SaaS marketing, please email Mike at mike@seekwell.io
The topics we cover
2:35 How Mike Ritchie and his co-founder, Thabo Fisher of Seekwell discovered the need for their product
5:57 Deciding to not go down the venture capital path
8:08 Seekwell's typical customer profile
10:01 Getting the first paying customer within 30 days
14:26 Rewriting Seekwell's codebase and doubling down on what customer's love.
16:40 Applying for TinySeed
20:03 Raising prices and adjusting Seekwell's value metric
25:53 Examples of creative use cases for Seekwell
29:02 Since Seekwell launched, have there been any low points?
Links from the show
Seekwell
Seekwell on Twitter
Mike Ritchie on Twitter
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/25/2020 • 31 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 510 | The Story of Startups.com
On today's episode, Rob chats Wil Schroter about the story behind Startups.com, the importance of output vs. hours, being specific about the kind of things you don't want to do in life, choosing venture capital, and much more.
The topics we cover
2:43 How soon after first acquisition did Wil Schroter, CEO and founder of Startups.com, want to start the next thing?
5:42 Wil on building an incubator in the early days
8:55 History behind swapalease.com
11:22 On choosing if and when to take on venture funding and the origins for Startups.com
14:19 What is Startups.com and how much revenue does it generate?
19:41 Why Wil manages so many aspects of the business
23:41 The hardest part of building Startups.com
29:58 Wil's thought process on acquiring companies
Links from the show
Startups.com
The Shocking Collapse of Zirtual and Maren Kate’s Next Act (plus How to Hire Well) | Episode 486
Swapalease.com
Virtucon Ventures
Clarity.FM
Launchrock.com
Zirtual.com
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/18/2020 • 34 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 509 | Revisiting the Six Stages of SaaS Growth with DNSimple
Show Notes
Today, we have a conversation between Rob and Anthony Eden from DNSimple as they revisit the six stages of SaaS growth starting with pre-launch and pre product-market fit to scaling and company building. Be sure to listen in until the end of the podcast as they talk about what lies beyond company building, the sixth stage of SaaS growth.
The topics we cover
5:10 Stage 1 - Prelaunch
10:08 Stage 2: Pre Product-Market Fit
13:40 Stage 3: Product Market Fit
16:38 Stage 4: Escape Velocity
21:08 Stage 5: Scale
33:48 Stage 6: Company Building (and Beyond)
38:13 DNSimple and Acquisition Offers
Links from the show
MicroConf Remote
MicroConf On Air: Connect Founder Spotlight with Anthony Eden
Episode 35: When Co-Founders Fall Apart | Zen Founder
Episode 499 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth – Part 1 | Startups for the Rest of Us
Episode 499.5 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth – Part 2 | Startups for the Rest of Us
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/11/2020 • 42 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode 508 | Finding Marketing Channels, Seat-Limited Trials, Building a Brand, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
On today's episode, Rob is joined by Asia Orangio as they answer listener questions ranging from how to find the right marketing channel, how to build a brand for your business, as well as how to decide whether to start or join a startup.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for the next episode. We'd love to hear from you!
The questions we cover
3:13 Mike Lollar - How to find the right marketing channel
10:47 Cole Hooey - Feedback on freemium pricing model for an HR app
16:18 Robert Brandl - Should I invest in branding?
26:25 Etan Efrati - Decision framework for choosing whether to start or join a startup
Links from the show
Asia Orangio | Twitter
DemandMaven.io
In Demand | Podcast
How to Acquire Your First 100 Customers - Asia Matos | MicroConf Talk
MicroConf On Air: How to Earn Your First 100 Customers | MicroCon On Air
Moz
Ahref
WebsiteToolTester.com
Regret Minimization Framework | Jeff Bezos
Decisive: How to Make Better Choices in Life and Work | Book
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
8/4/2020 • 34 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode 507 | Making Cold Email Work in B2B SaaS
Show Notes
On today's episode, Rob chats with Damian Thompson, co-founder of LeadFuze. He's also the founder of VPSales. They talk about if and when to hire a sales team, the kinds of cold email outreach campaigns that are working well today, the sales stack, and much more.
The topics we cover
5:43 Should a bootstrapper hire a Sales Development Rep (SDR)?
9:16 Assuming you understand your market, what kind of cold emails work today?
12:56 The formula to use for B2B cold email
14:37 Risks of bootstrappers hiring sales reps too quickly
17:19 Rule of thumb for hiring sales reps in 2020
21:29 Defining SDR (Sales Development Rep) and BDR (Business Development Rep)
24:47 What's the bare minimum for a sales stack
36:42 The real challenge with outbound sales
Links from the show
Leadfuze
VPSales
Five Whys
Aircall
Hubspot
Pipedrive
Prospect.io
Mailshake
Gong
Chorus.ai
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/28/2020 • 44 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 506 | Shutting Down and Starting Up with Derrick Reimer
On today's episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob catches up with guest Derrick Reimer as they discuss shutting down a slack competitor while building and preparing to launch a new calendar SaaS. They discuss topics like user research, defining and validating an idea, choosing a big market, viral loops, and more.
The topics we cover with Derrick Reimer
2:49 Shutting down a Slack competitor
6:32 Building StaticKit to get something in the market
13:16 Developing the next idea
17:03 Validating the Mighty Cal idea
19:07 Potential dangers of going into a big competitive space
23:38 Choosing the specific customer/s to target for Mighty Cal
25:45 Built-in Viral loops
Links from the show
@derrickreimer | Twitter
The Value vs. Stress of Twitter, Pros and Cons of Remote Work, and Digital Minimalism – A Discussion Show with Derrick Reimer | Episode 482
How Derrick Reimer is Validating His Ambitious Third SaaS Application | Episode 399
The Art of Product with Guests Derrick Reimer and Ben Orenstein | Episode 354
What It’s Like Selling a $128k Side Project (With Guest Derrick Reimer) | Episode 311
How to Mentally & Technically Prepare For Your Launch (With Guest Derrick Reimer) | Episode 274
StaticKit
Drip
Mighty Cal
Codetree
The Mom Test | Book
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/21/2020 • 28 minutes, 15 seconds
Episode 505 | 42 Side Projects and the #NoCode Movement
Show Notes
You've probably heard a lot about the #NoCode movement but may not know what it means, exactly. Today, we have the great pleasure of talking with someone who is knee-deep in the #NoCode movement.
Helen Ryles has launched 42 projects over 10+ years and on this episode, she shares with us why she builds so many products, her process for choosing what to work on, and how she determines a good time to sell a #NoCode product.
The topics we cover with Helen Ryles
6:11 Ryles on why she chose to launch so many products
9:04 The snowball effect for learning new skills
14:10 Advice for reluctant marketers
16:05 Keeping side-projects small on purpose
18:27 Deciding when to sell a business
21:41 A primer on the #NoCode movement
Links from the show
Helen Ryles | Twitter
Side Project Review - 2020 - @HelenRyles | Google Sheets
TinyHello
NamesAce
FeedbackFridays.com
NoCodeo.com
NoCodeo.com
SideProjectors
Borderline.biz
Podwords
NocodeExchange.com
IndieMaker.co
Carrd
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for an upcoming episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
7/14/2020 • 30 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 504 | 15 Tools We Use to Run Our Business
This week we chat with Tracy Osborn (@tracymakes) as we discuss 15 of the top tools we use to run our businesses. As a followup to a previous, popular tweet, we thought we'd give an update on what tools we continue to use today, as well as share some of the new tools we have started to use.
While tools are necessary for founders, it's important to find a good balance between good-enough and perfect when it comes to evaluating which tools to use. As Tracy says in the show, "It's a good lesson for founders because they often want to build something the 'right way' from the start. Many times there are tradeoffs and sometimes you have to use the tool that has constraints so that you can work faster. It might not be perfect, but it gets the job done."
Are you using any of the tools we mention in the show or have a tool you think we should use? Let us know in the comments!
The top 15 tools we cover
6:04 #1 Calendly vs YouCanBook.me
7:45 #2 Slack: how and why we use it
12:20 #3 How we use Notion for permanent documentation
16:21 #4 Google Drive vs Dropbox for Business
18:42 #5 LastPass for Business
20:05 #6 Dasharoo
21:57 #7 Squadcast.fm & Castos.fm to run this podcast
23.57 #8 Drip & RightMessage for email marketing
25:15 #9 Trello for personal business (vs other task management tools)
26:57 #10 Squarespace for websites
30:35 #11 Voxer push to talk audio vs text messaging
32:52 #12 Keynote for conference talks and eBook PDFs
36:02 #13 Tweetbot vs Twitter.com
38:08 #14 Buffer
39:29 #15 Submittable and Pipedrive
42:20 BONUS: FrontApp for email collaboration
Links from the show
Tracy Osborn | tracyosborn.com
Tracy Osborn on Twitter
Rob's tweet on tools used | Twitter
Calendly
YouCanBook.me
Discord
Discourse
Basecamp
Notion
Dasharoo
Lastpass
Sunrise KPI
Trello
Establishing a High-Performance Productivity Stack with Tracy Osborn | MicroConf on Air
Squarespace
Voxer
Guides: 18 Things SaaS Founders Should Know | Startups For the Rest of Us
Zencaster
Squadcast
Casto
7/7/2020 • 45 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 503 | Idea Validation, Expanding Internationally, Affiliate Programs, and More Listener Questions
This week Rob answers some great listener questions. We discuss the best way to validate a product idea, how to expand a product with traction internationally, advice on launching a restaurant product during COVID-19, and whether to start an affiliate program.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like us to cover, please submit your question for the next episode. We'd love to hear from you!
The listener questions we cover
1:39 [Arturo Ceballos] What's the best way to validate an idea and pre-launch without an audience?
13:33 [Ger Apeldoorn] When a product has product-market fit and existing customers, how would you grow internationally?
20:31 [Davis] Do you have any experience running an affiliate program. I'm worried about people that sign up for affiliate would be people that would signup anyways?
26:40 [Jacob Warren] Should I launch a startup in the service/hospitality industry during COVID-19?
28:21 [Casey Collins] Following the Stairstep approach, what's the best marketplace to use?
Links from the show
Vetting a startup (or two): The systematic birth of @WPEngine | Jason Cohen
Idea Validation & Risk Avoidance | Episode 324
The Stairstep Approach to Bootstrapping | Rob Walling
Clay Collins on Leadpages and how they used affiliate marketing | Podcast
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode, let us know by clicking the link and sharing what you learned.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
If you have questions about starting or scaling a software business that you'd like for us to cover, please submit your question for the next episode. We'd love to hear from you!
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/30/2020 • 32 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 502 | Accelerating Growth and a Failed Product Hunt Launch
In his second appearance on the show (he first appeared on Episode 367), we chat with Benedikt Deicke from Userlist. Along with his co-founder, Jane Portman, they are building an easy to use customer messaging tool catered specifically towards SaaS companies.
In this show, we talk about some of the challenges in building a product while working full-time, finding the ideal SaaS pricing model, their underwhelming Product Hunt launch, as well as their recent purchase of the Userlist.com domain name.
Jane & Benedikt are also part of Tinyseed batch #2, and we explore Benedikt's experience so far in the program, and the lessons he's learned.
What we discuss with Benedikt Deicke
1:37 The story & motivation behind helpfounders.com
4:30 Userlist and slow growth in the early days
5:30 Challenges with building a SaaS while not full-time
7:50 What has helped with recent Userlist growth
9:00 Navigating SaaS pricing
12:30 An underwhelming Product Hunt launch
15:30 Acquiring the userlist.com domain name
17:30 The most challenging moments thus far in building Userlist
20:48 Why did Jane & Benedikt apply to Tinyseed
Links from the show:
HelpFounders
Benedikt Deicke | Twitter
Jane Portman | Twitter
Slow & Steady | Podcast
Userlist
Fighting to Gain Traction in a Crowded Space with Jane Portman of Userlist | Episode 471
Userlist on Product Hunt
Tinyseed
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode with Benedikt Deicke, let him know by clicking on the link below and sending him a quick shout out on Twitter:
Click here to thank Benedikt Deicke on Twitter.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/23/2020 • 25 minutes, 51 seconds
Episode 501 | A Bluetick Update from Mike #Taber
In the first episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us since our 500th milestone, Rob checks in with Mike Taber about his progress with Bluetick.
It's been nearly 7 weeks since Rob last checked in (Episode 494) and a lot has happened in the world since then. They talk about business trajectory amidst COVID-19, the health of the sales pipeline and unique partnership opportunities, as well as technical debt and making decisions about code optimization.
What we discuss with Mike Taber
6:38 Rob and Mike reflect on what made the podcast successful
12:05 Has Bluetick seen an uptick in interest since COVID-19?
16:58 Is Mike an optimist, or a pessimist (and what would Mike's wife say)?
18:55 The highs and lows from the past few weeks
20:41 Mike on driving new prospects for Bluetick
22:38 Bluetick and unique partnership opportunities
30:47 Managing technical debt and making decisions on optimizing your code
Links from the show:
Mythical Man-Month | Book
Mike Taber on Twitter
BlueTick
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode with Mike Taber, let him know by clicking on the link below and sending him a quick shout out on Twitter:
Click here to thank Mike Taber on Twitter.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/16/2020 • 40 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 500
This is a big milestone episode for Startups for the Rest of Us. Episode 500. Since the very first episode nearly a decade ago we've had more than 10 million downloads, answered more than 1,500 listener questions, and shared more than 292 hours of startup content. Over the years, this podcast has developed a particular lens through which we view building and growing startups. We've focused on:
Maintaining freedom, purpose, and relationships throughout the journey
Diving deep into topics relating to building and growing startups, using an ambitious yet sane approach.
Thinking in years, not months
Not talking about the typical Silicon Valley startups (where fundraising is a goal in and of itself)
Building real companies with real customers who pay us real money
Not sacrificing our health or our relationships
As we look to 1,000 episodes and beyond, we decided to highlight the stories from the community as they share how the past 500 episodes have made an impact on their path to starting and growing successful (and sane) startups.
The cache of stories, lessons, real heartfelt moments are what really keep me coming back to Startups for the Rest of Us and why I recommend it to so many people. It's not just one particular episode or one particular lesson, it's the complete story arc of Rob, Mike, the team, and what they've built. It's an exciting time to be a small part of this journey.
— Matt Medeiros
Building a self-funded startup on the internet doesn't have to be complicated. We're making a thing, we're solving a problem. We're selling our solution to customers. Rinse and repeat. The more attempts at doing that, the more that we're going to learn and the more mistakes that we'll make, the more wins that we'll have.
— Brian Casel
What we discuss
2:26 - Launching MicroConf from the podcast
4:11 - The many types of episodes we've tried
7:18 - Why we think the show has worked
9:49 - How you can support the show
11:22 - Ian and Dan (Tropical MBA podcast) on the importance of the stairstep approach
13:33 - Ben Orenstein (Art of Product podcast) on the value of consistency
14:13 - Matt Medeiros (Matt Report podcast) says this podcast is the startup single source of truth
16:42 - Brian and Benedikt (Slow & Steady podcast) on small continuous progress over time
19:50 - Adrian Rosebrock (Listener)
20:16 - Jordan Gal (Bootstrapped Web podcast) speaks to the importance of perseverance
21:57 - Andy Baldacci (Effective Founder podcast) shares his experience with the stairstep approach
26:48 - Brian Casel (Bootstrapped Web podcast) on knowing there are "others just like me"
28:52 - Matt & Peter (Out of Beta podcast) on how they feel connected to the community
32:58 - Alvin (listener) loves the actionable, specific, and realistic feedback
34:58 - Shawn DeWolfe (Shawn DeWolfe Consulting) on how entrepreneurship feels attainable because of the podcast
Links from the show:
What is a Micropreneur | Episode 1
MicroConf
The Stairstep Approach to Bootstrapping | <a href=
6/9/2020 • 41 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 499.5 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth - Part 2
This episode is part two in a two-part conversation. If you haven't already, listen to Part 1 first.
This week is the second part of a conversation between Rob and Jordan Gal, the founder of CartHook. In the episode, Rob and Jordan dig into the 4th, 5th and 6th stages of SaaS growth and compare their journeys 1:1 between growing Drip and growing CartHook. They come across several parallels between their journeys, as well as some differences. This episode is part two in a two-part conversation.
Jordan started CartHook as cart abandonment software and later pivoted into a checkout replacement solution for Shopify. He has been on the podcast several times answering listener questions and has spoken at a handful of MicroConfs. He is also the co-host of the Bootstrapped Web podcast.
Every time we come up against the hill and then climb it and get to the top, when we look outward, we see so much more. So, the opportunity just keeps getting bigger the further we go. We're not even close. We're just barely getting started.
- Jordan Gal
What we discuss with Jordan Gal
1:10 Rob's experience with Stage 4: Escape Velocity
4:35 Jordan Gal's experience with Stage 4: Escape Velocity
9:06 Parallels between Drip & CartHook's journeys
9:50 Jordon on hitting limitations and looking beyond money
15:27 A fast-growing business isn't profitable
17:26 Rob's experience with Stage 5: Scale
21:54 Jordan's experience with Stage 5: Scale
25:10 Stage 6: Company Building
27:39 The range of skills founders need when building a startup
30:18 Jordan Gal on the future of CartHook
Links from the show:
CartHook
Bootstrapped Web
Jordan Gal | Twitter
[Watch] Two Years in the SaaS Trenches - Jordan Gal | MicroConf Starter 2017
[Listen] “We Went from Hundreds of Free Trials to a Few Dozen…On Purpose” with Jordan Gal | Episode 476
How can I support the podcast?
If you enjoyed this episode with Jordal Gal, let him know by clicking on the link below and sending him a quick shout out on Twitter:
Click here to thank Jordan Gal on Twitter.
Click here to share your number one takeaway from the episode.
Subscribe & Review: iTunes | Spotify | Stitcher
6/5/2020 • 32 minutes, 21 seconds
Bonus | The Struggle for Lasting Change
6/4/2020 • 1 minute, 52 seconds
Episode 499 | The (First) Six Stages of SaaS Growth - Part 1
This week is a conversation between Rob and Jordan Gal, the founder of Cart Hook. We dig into the six stages of SaaS growth. We compare our journeys 1:1 between growing Drip and growing CartHook. It's shocking how well the journeys line up with each other. Some of the differences in the journey are also quite striking. This episode is part one, and part two will go live later this week.
Jordan started CartHook as cart abandonment software and became a checkout replacement solution for Shopify. He has been on the podcast a few times answering questions, and he has spoken at MicroConf a few times. He is also the co-host of the Bootstrapped Web podcast.
The finer points of the episode:
6:00 - Stage 1: Prelaunch
8:33 - How to create your own luck when your SaaS app is in the prelaunch phase
13:37 - Stage 2: Post Launch
14:25 - The journey to finding product-market fit
22:25 - The most challenging parts of the journey for Rob and Jordan
23:29 - Stage 3: Product Market Fit
Items mentioned in this episode:
CartHook
Bootstrapped Web
Find Jordan on Twitter
6/2/2020 • 34 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 498 | Selling During a Pandemic with Steli Efti
This week Rob talks with Steli Efti about selling during a pandemic. They also talk about how to set yourself up for success as a founder during a possible recession and how to adjust your sales process. You don't want to shy away from sales, but you also don't want to be tone-deaf to the current state of the world. Steli is one of the world's experts in startup sales and B2B sales. He runs a successful app called Close.com. He has written a number of ebooks on the topic of sales, and he has been a recognized expert for over a decade.
The finer points of the episode:
4:15 - Two big sales trends that Steli has noticed during the COVID-19 crisis
9:09 - The main thing you can do for your business right now
13:55 - How to approach a sales conversation while being sensitive to the current circumstances
16:33 - How Close.com managed to increase their revenue and grow through 2020
25:00 - How Steli sees his sales process looking after COVID-19
30:25 - Best practices for sending cold emails during the pandemic
Items mentioned in this episode:
BaseCamp
Close.com
The Startup Chat
Email Steli for the crisis toolkit
Follow Steli on Twitter
5/26/2020 • 39 minutes, 39 seconds
Episode 497 | Documenting SaaS for a Sale, Email Harvesting and Spam, and More Listener Questions
This week Rob answers listener questions with TinySeed co-founder Einar Vollset. Einar has been on the selling side of many SaaS acquisitions. He is also a developer with a Ph.D. in computer science, so he has a well-rounded experience, and it makes him the perfect person to answer these listener questions. There are some interesting questions from listeners who are growing SaaS apps.
The finer points of the episode:
2:38 - What metrics you should be documenting on your SaaS app
9:04 - The things buyers checked on when we were selling Drip
13:00 - How to navigate creating the terms for a business partnership
18:43 - Should you be sending unsolicited marketing emails?
24:18 - Best strategies to make sales
27:32 - Potential opportunities to make sales during the COVID-19 crisis
Items mentioned in this episode:
tinyseed.com/invest
Find Einar on Twitter
5/19/2020 • 30 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 496 | "The Press Covers Exceptions, Don't Compare Yourself to Slack or Zoom"
This interview was recorded several months ago, but is still relevant despite the pandemic. Colin Nederkoorn, the co-founder of customer.io has taken a unique approach to building their company. Customer.io does marketing automation for the entire customer lifecycle. They have raised funding, but not traditional venture money, and they've run it more like a self-funded SaaS. Colin and his cofounder John left their jobs with no savings, and they set out to build an analytics tool. Their story is powerful because of their unconventional approach and ability to persevere through hard times.
The finer points of the episode:
4:05 - The customer.io founder journey
5:23 - Their approach to selecting investors
7:01 - Reflecting on how Colin and John bootstrapped a SaaS app after leaving their jobs with no savings
8:02 - Why they pivoted from an analytics company to selling marketing solutions
13:15 - Finding the balance between innovation vs following the best practices
18:37 - How customer.io became a remote company, and the advantages/disadvantages of building a remote team
22:05 - What customer.io is doing to support the bootstrapping startup community (and why they care about bootstrappers)
24:30 - Marketing approaches that customer.io used in the earlier days
31:55 - The highs and lows of building customer.io
Items mentioned in this episode:
customer.io
helpfounders.com
hugo.team
customer.io/bootstrapper
Connect with Colin on Twitter
5/12/2020 • 38 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 495 | Advice, Competition, Marketing, and Managing Developers (A Rob Solo Adventure)
Today, Rob flies solo to talk about 7 different things that he has learned in his 20 years of entrepreneurship. He also offers some feedback about what he is seeing in the startup communities today, advice on how to deal with competition, marketing tips, and how to build a team of developers.
The finer points of the episode:
2:35 - Be careful about over-generalizing from one win
3:33 - The three things you need in order to succeed in building a startup
8:10 - How to handle feedback you get on your product
12:48 - Rob's personal experience and opinion on dealing with competition in the startup space
15:35 - Why word-of-mouth is not the right answer for where your leads are coming from
18:40 - The real reason why some startups are "transparent"
21:05 - Advice on how to build a team of developers
Items mentioned in this episode:
Start Small Stay Small
5/5/2020 • 24 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 494 | A Bluetick Update From Mike Taber
This week we catch up with Mike Taber, he comes on the show every once in a while to share his progress as he grows his SaaS App, Bluetick. We haven't checked in with Mike since before the quarantine, and the last time we spoke to him, he had more than doubled his revenue in the past 4-5 months. We will talk about how the COVID-19 crisis has affected Bluetick and other SaaS apps, some new insights that Mike has been learning about his customer base, and decisions he has made about the positioning and marketing of Bluetick.
It is difficult to try and land new customers when we are facing a global pandemic and a possible recession. If you are working on a startup, you might find it helpful to know how someone else is handling this crisis in their business.
The finer points of the episode:
5:00 - How Bluetick and other SAS apps have been affected by the COVID-19 crisis
8:35 - Mike's biggest success and biggest defeat in the past 7 weeks
11:32 - Where Mike's customers are finding him?
12:53 - What makes Bluetick different from its competitors
15:27 - An update on Mike's email campaign to canceled customers
19:08 - Mike's plans to change the positioning and copy on his website now that he understands how people are using Bluetick
25:28 - An update on Mike's podcast tour
29:36 - What Mike is looking forward to over the next month
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Video Vault
Basecamp
Bluetick
4/28/2020 • 35 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 493 | A Roundtable Discussion about COVID-19, Working From Home, Payroll Protection and More
This is a round table discussion with Craig Hewitt (founder of Castos), Einar Vollset (cofounder of TinySeed), and myself. We are in three different cities on two different continents, so we have plenty of different perspectives on the COVID-19 crisis. We are talking about our own businesses and the advice we give to other founders. We also talk about the payroll program, and whether we think it's going to be helpful to small businesses and startups. We share our tips and experiences working from home, for founders who may be just now transitioning to a remote team, and we discuss Stewart Butterfield's Twitter feed, talking about the human side of experiencing this pandemic.
Listen to get some insight, hope, and fresh ideas on being a startup during COVID-19.
The finer points of the episode:
8:09 - Advice we all have for startups during the COVID-19 crisis
12:51 - Common mistakes we see businesses make working from home
14:42 - The main things that change when your team goes remote
17:37 - The payroll protection program in the USA and what this could mean for your business
28:04 - Stewart Butterfield's real-time experience of COVID-19 and how it resonated with each of us as founders
36:46 - Some reasons to feel hopeful about business right now
Items mentioned in this episode:
RougueStartups
Castos
TinySeed
How Apple Is Working From Home
Bosses Panic-Buy Spy Software to Keep Tabs on Remote Workers
MicroConf article on COVID-19 business relief
Stewart Butterfield's Twitter feed
Craig Hewitt's Twitter Account
Einar Vollset's Twitter Account
4/21/2020 • 40 minutes, 31 seconds
Bonus Episode: What Courtland Allen Has Learned Interviewing 155 Startup Founders
This bonus episode of Startup For The Rest Of Us is from a MicroConf On Air live stream in which Rob interviews Courtland Allen, founder of Indie Hackers, about interviewing 155 startup founders and what he learned from building a community from scratch. It was such a great conversation, I wanted to put it in this podcast feed, so more people can benefit from Courtland’s insight.
The finer points of the episode:
6:28 - Why B2C businesses are more attractive, but B2B may be more lucrative
11:30 - Competitive advantages that can’t be surmounted by the competition.
17:50 - How Courtland jumpstarted the Indie Hackers online community
22:46 - Why you can’t just rely on internal motivation to get your startup off the ground
25:36 - The common thread Courtland has seen in successful founders
30:00 - The truth about how hard you have to work when building a business
31:57 - Overcoming imposter syndrome when entering a new industry
Items mentioned in the episode:
Indie Hackers Podcast
Join the MicroConf Slack Community
MicroConf On Air Podcast
Base Camp
Stripe
4/16/2020 • 34 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 492 | From Zero to $55k MRR to Exit (in 2 Years) with Feedback Panda
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob interviews Danielle Simpson and Arvid Kahl, co-founders of FeedbackPanda, a SaaS business they bootstrapped to $55k MRR with no outside funding and no employees. They sold directly to teachers, a price-sensitive market, and they used referral programs and word of mouth to create rapid growth. You will hear about the struggles, victories, highs, and lows of their startup journey. Arvid and Danielle give honest, powerful insight into what it was really like to manage their company just the two of them, and what ultimately led to their decision to sell their company for a life-changing amount of money.
* We are in a slightly different headspace in this episode, because we recorded this before the COVID-19 crisis. But we still wanted to share this episode, because we want you to benefit from this powerful conversation.
The finer points of the episode:
2:12 - What it was like to sell FeedbackPanda for a lifechanging sum of money
6:40 - Why they ultimately made the decision to sell their business
12:40 - How the perfect combination of luck and skill led to their business’ huge success
14:38 - What it was like selling to teachers, a price-sensitive market
18:44 - Using referral programs and word-of-mouth to generate extremely rapid growth
24:20 - Can their approach to growth be replicated in other industries?
29:11 - More about their decision not to hire anyone
33:49 - The biggest low point of their startup journey and how they overcame them
38:25 - When did they start thinking about selling their company?
40:34 - What is next for Arvid and Danielle?
Items mentioned in this episode:
The Bootstrapped Founder
Danielle Simpson
Danielle's Twitter
Arvid's Twitter
4/14/2020 • 43 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 491 | Hard Lessons Learned, Reaching High-Touch Prospects, Finding Advisors, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob along with guest Matt Wensing, answer a number of listener questions on topics including reaching high-touch prospects, finding advisors and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
RiskPulse
Olive
Crewbooks
Out of Beta Podcast
Patrick Campbell's MicroConf Talk
4/7/2020 • 46 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 490 | How Founders Should Be Thinking About the Current Crisis
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob along with guest Einar Vollset, talk about the current crisis and as a founder what your mindset should be and what to do to be prepared.
#1: Don't panic, clear heads will prevail
#2: No business is recession proof
#3: Be cautious
#4: Heavily scrutinize all marketing and sales efforts
#5: Take care of yourself and those around you
#6: At times like these, cash is king
#7: We're going to make it through this
Items mentioned in this episode:
ZenFounder
Bidsketch
MicroConf
MicroConf On Air
3/31/2020 • 38 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 489.5 | It All Started 10 Years Ago Today
Show Notes
10 years to the day....Startups For The Rest Of Us was born. In this episode Rob reflects back on he and Mike Taber starting the podcast all those years ago and the journey its been. This episode includes a 5 minute play of the very first episode of the podcast.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Startups For The Rest Of Us Episode:1
Product Hunt SFTROU Post
3/30/2020 • 9 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 489 | 15 Years to a SaaS Exit (Plus Why Forecasting is Crucial)
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Matt Wensing about his exit from his company Riskpulse, dealing with multiple investors, his new company Summt, and why forecasting is crucial.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
MicroConf On-Air
Castos
Summit
Out of Beta Podcast
3/24/2020 • 38 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 488 | A Bluetick Progress Update from Mike Taber
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob checks in with Mike Taber about his progress with Bluetick. They talk about new growth, where that growth is coming from, theories on why customers are choosing Bluetick over competitors, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Connect
Bluetick.io
3/17/2020 • 36 minutes
Episode 487 | Startup Roundtable Discussing Hey.com, Leadpages’ Acquisition, and More Hot Topics
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob is joined by Jordan Gal and Tracy Osborn for a roundtable discussion. Some of the topics in this episode including Basecamp reinventing email with Hey.com, Leadpages being acquired by Redbrick, the growing popularity of subscription based pricing and how many active subscriptions a person or business has nowadays.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bootstrapped Web Podcast
CartHook
Hey.com
Leadpages acquired by Redbrick
How a 2 person startup already uses 28 other tools
Tracy Osborn
3/10/2020 • 41 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode 486 | The Shocking Collapse of Zirtual and Maren Kate’s Next Act (plus How to Hire Well)
Show Notes
In this episode Startups For The Rest Of Us Rob interviews Maren Kate of Avra Talent about her entrepreneurial journey. She talks about her first company that raised 5.5 million in funding, hit $1mil in MRR, had over 400 employees, but ultimately failed. She talks about how she recovered both mentally and professionally, and gives her system of hiring/vetting people for your company.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Avra Talent
TinySeed
3/3/2020 • 36 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 485 | Catching Up with Rob (An Interview by Dr. Sherry Walling)
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, the tables have turned as Rob is interviewed by Dr. Sherry Walling. They talk MicroConf, the podcast, state of independent SaaS report and TinySeed but also explore bigger themes like what Rob wants to accomplish with all of his businesses and a unifying theme he's established across the board.
Items mentioned in this episode:
SherryWalling.com
ZenFounder
TinySeed
MicroConf
MicroConf Connect
State of Indie SaaS
2/25/2020 • 41 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 484 | Marketing That’s Working Today, Moving from 5 to 10 Employees, SaaS Longevity, and More Listener Questions
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob along with guest Ruben Gamez answer a number of listener questions on topics including current marketing tactics, scaling from 5 to 10 employees, SaaS longevity and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Docsketch
Bidsketch
MicroConf Connect
Peldi’ s article about profit sharing
Quiet Light Brokerage
FE International
Empire Flippers
2/18/2020 • 40 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 483 | Building a Mindset for SaaS Growth with Andy Baldacci
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob interviews growth marketer Andy Baldacci about how he got his start, his early days at Hubstaff, marketing for Groove, and he gives some practical tips/advice for the listeners.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Connect
SaberSim
The Effective Founder Podcast
2/11/2020 • 40 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 482 | The Value vs. Stress of Twitter, Pros and Cons of Remote Work, and Digital Minimalism - A Discussion Show with Derrick Reimer
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob does a discussion show format with guest Derrick Reimer. They discuss multiple topics including the pros/cons of remote work, value vs. stress of Twitter, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
The Art of Product Podcast
Derrickreimer.com
StaticKit
Baremetrics Blog Post: "I almost sold Baremetrics for $5M"
Baremetrics Blog Post: "5 things I learned failing to sell Baremetrics for $5M"
2/4/2020 • 39 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode 481 | A Bluetick Update from Mike #Taber
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob checks in with Mike Taber's progress with Bluetick. They talk about his big new customer, traction on the podcast tour, Mike's outreach to his LinkedIn connections, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick.io
1/28/2020 • 43 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode 480 | Stairstepping Your Way to SaaS with Christopher Gimmer
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Christopher Gimmer of Snappa, about his journey to making SaaS his full-time income. He details how he stair-stepped his way from small apps and products to 7 figure SaaS.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
Baremetrics
1/21/2020 • 37 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode 479 | Two-Sided Marketplaces, Hotseats, Forgotten Subscriptions, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob along with Tracy Osborn , answer a number of listener questions on topics including founder hotseats, forgotten subscriptions, two-sided market places and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
State of Indie SaaS Report
Metcalfe's Law
Stack Overflow
GrowthHackers
Tracy Osborn
1/14/2020 • 26 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode 478 | A Few Things I Learned in 2019
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob reflects back on his goals of 2019 and shares some lessons that are broadly applicable to founders/entrepreneurs. He also shares how he “unplugged” from the internet/devices while on a recent vacation with his family and the benefits he experienced.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
TinySeed
The State of Independent SaaS Report
1/7/2020 • 24 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 477 | Assessing Product-Market Fit, How to Find a Mastermind, and More Listener Questions with Brian Casel
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Brian Casel of Audience Ops, answer a number of listener questions on topics including assessing product market fit, finding a mastermind and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bootstrapped Web Podcast
The TMBA Podcast
Dynamite Circle
Productize Course
MastermindJam
12/31/2019 • 39 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode 476 | “We Went from Hundreds of Free Trials to a Few Dozen...On Purpose” with Jordan Gal
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Jordan Gal of CartHook about his big move to stop his free trials, move to demos, and increase his prices.
Items mentioned in this episode:
CartHook
Bootstrapped Web Podcast
CartHook Pricing Change Blog Post
Lincoln Murphy blog post about Qualification
12/24/2019 • 47 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 475 | A Bluetick Update from #Mike Taber
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob checks in with Mike Taber on his continued progress with Bluetick. The final conclusion to the Google audit is revealed, and they check in with the .Net component problem, the podcast tour, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick
12/17/2019 • 40 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode 474.5 | The Future of MicroConf
Show Notes
In this half episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob makes the biggest announcement in MicroConf history and talks about the future of the conference.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
12/13/2019 • 7 minutes, 57 seconds
TinySeed Tales 8 | Success and the Ongoing Struggle
Show Notes
On this final episode following Craig Hewitt of Castos, Rob checks in to get the results of the “no credit trial” decision, and to see whether or not the move increased conversions.
12/12/2019 • 21 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 474 | Overcoming a 40% Decline in MRR with Brian Casel
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Brian Casel of Audience Ops, about recovering from a 40% decline in MRR. They start the story back in 2016 and work through the decline, audience ops rebound, the start of Ops Calendar, and Brian's decision to learn how to code.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bootstrapped Web
MicroConf
ProcessKit
Codementor.io
12/10/2019 • 46 minutes, 41 seconds
TinySeed Tales 7 | The Growing Pains of Delegation
Show Notes
This week Craig Hewitt of Castos, feels the pains of a growing team and talks about how his role as a founder must evolve as the team continues to grow.
12/5/2019 • 24 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode 473 | Managing Annual Subscriptions, Low-price vs. High, Being a Non-Developer Founder, and More Listener Questions with Laura Roeder
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Laura Roeder joins the podcast to answer a number of listener questions on topics including managing annual subscriptions, being a non-developer founder, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MeetEdgar
MicroConf
Stripe
12/3/2019 • 41 minutes, 20 seconds
TinySeed Tales 6 | The No Credit Card Trial
Show Notes
In this week’s episode Craig Hewitt “turns the business on it’s head” by implementing a no credit card trial.
11/28/2019 • 22 minutes, 50 seconds
Episode 472 | From Amazing Launch to Near Bankruptcy to Profitability with Shai Schechter
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Shai Schechter of RightMessage, about his amazing launch and then finding himself near bankruptcy and how he was able to right the ship.
Items mentioned in this episode:
RightMessage
RightMessage.baremetrics
Shai.io
MicroConf Europe
11/26/2019 • 42 minutes, 3 seconds
TinySeed Tales 5 | Building a Business That Runs Itself
Show Notes
Rob is back with Craig Hewitt of Castos. They talk about learning to delegate more of his responsibilities as a new growth marketer joins the team.
11/21/2019 • 15 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 471 | Fighting to Gain Traction in a Crowded Space with Jane Portman of Userlist
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Jane Portman of Userlist. They discuss the struggles of growing slowly, gaining traction in the crowded space, and some of the lessons learned from her first SaaS app.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Userlist
UI Breakfast Podcast
User Onboarding: The Ultimate Guide for SaaS Founders
11/19/2019 • 32 minutes, 39 seconds
TinySeed Tales 4 | A Bug in the Funnel and Giving Up Control
Show Notes
Rob does another follow up with Crag Hewitt of Castos, they talk about his new hire (growth marketer) and news of a major break-through.
11/14/2019 • 21 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 470 | A Bluetick Update from Mike Taber
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob checks in with Mike Taber on his progress with Bluetick. They talk about the finale of the Google audit, a new integration. and trying to find differentiation in the market.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
Zapier
11/12/2019 • 45 minutes, 57 seconds
TinySeed Tales 3 | The Best News Ever and the Slog
Show Notes
Rob follows up with Craig Hewitt of Castos, as he shares some big news on the podcast
11/7/2019 • 20 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode 469 | Key Takeaways from MicroConf Europe 2019
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike walk you through some of the talks and key takeways from MicroConf Europe 2019.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
MicroConf Europe
Balsamiq
HubSpot
picture of an evening reception at MicroConf Europe 2019 at Vala Beach
11/5/2019 • 34 minutes, 8 seconds
TinySeed Tales 2 | Riding the Startup Wave
Show Notes
Rob continues his conversation with Craig Hewitt of Castos in this week’s episode of “TinySeed Tales”.
10/31/2019 • 21 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode 468 | Tables Are Turned As Tracy Osborn Interviews Rob About the Past Year
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, the tables have turned as Tracy Osborn interviews Rob about his past year. They talk life after Drip, focusing on the backstory of TinySeed and the ups and downs that have come along since its launch.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
TracyOsborn
10/29/2019 • 38 minutes, 46 seconds
TinySeed Tales 1 | A Non-Technical SaaS Founder
Show Notes
Rob starts his new podcast series “TinySeed Tales,” with an interview with Craig Hewitt of Castos.
10/24/2019 • 19 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode 467 | “A Life-Changing Exit” with Adii Pienaar of Conversio
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Adii Pienaar of Conversio, about his life changing exit, when and why he decided to sell, and what the whole process was like.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Conversio
TinySeed
Adii.me
Discretion Capital
10/22/2019 • 43 minutes, 18 seconds
TinySeed Tales | Season 1 Trailer (Castos)
Show Notes
Rob introduces “TinySeed Tales”, a show that follows one SaaS founder week by week through their struggles, failures, and victories.
10/17/2019 • 1 minute, 18 seconds
Episode 466 | Answering Listener Questions With Craig Hewitt
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Craig Hewitt returns to the show to answer a number of listener questions on topics including productized services, podcasting, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bean Ninjas
Podcast Motor
LeadFuze
Castos
TinySeed
10/15/2019 • 40 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 465 | A Bluetick Update from Mike Taber
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob checks in with Mike Taber on his progress with Bluetick. They talk about Mike's motivation, specifically over the long term , the continuing Google security audit, differentiating from competitors and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
State of Independent SaaS Survey
Bluetick.io
10/8/2019 • 46 minutes, 52 seconds
Episode 464 | Highs, Lows, and Building Your First Sales Process with Steli Efti
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Steli Efti of Close.com, about his highs and lows of the past year as well as a in depth dive into starting your first sales process.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Close.com
MicroConf Europe
The Startup Chat
Zapier
CartHook
LeadFuze
10/1/2019 • 46 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 463.5 | Be Part of “The State of Independent SaaS”
Show Notes
In this half episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob announces the inaugural state of independent SaaS survey. A survey that looks at SaaS benchmarks for non-venture backed companies and how you can participate.
Items mentioned in this episode:
State of Independent SaaS Survey
Rob’s Video setup
9/27/2019 • 4 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 463 | Troubleshooting Enterprise Sales (A Founder Hotseat with David Heller)
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob does a Founder Hotseat with David Heller of Reimbi, about dealing with his specific issues with enterprise sales.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Reimbi
TinySeed
9/24/2019 • 34 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 462 | Competing Against an 800 lb. Gorilla, Splitting from Your Co-founder, and More Listener Questions (with Jeff Epstein)
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob along with co-host Jeff Epstein, answer a number of listener questions on topics including competing against a giant company, splitting from a co-founder, having enough features and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
TinySeed
9/17/2019 • 38 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 461 | Doubling Down on Bluetick
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob checks in with Mike Taber's progress on Bluetick. They revisit some topics that were brought up from their last episode together including motivation, personal retreat, accountability, the Google audit and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick
TinySeed
Airmail
Zapier
9/10/2019 • 48 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode 460 | Funded Competition, Growing an Email Newsletter Audience, White-Labeling and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and co-host Tracy Osborn answer a number of listener questions on topics including funded competition, growing an email newsletter audience, white-labeling and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe
MicroConf
APSE.io
Build Blockchain Tech
UpCounsel
Tracy Osborn
9/3/2019 • 39 minutes, 39 seconds
Episode 459 | From Day Job to Productized Service to Fast-Growing SaaS as a Non-Technical Founder
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob interviews Craig Hewitt of Castos, about the unique set of challenges to starting and growing a SaaS product as a non-technical founder.
Items mentioned in this episode:
RogueStartups
TinySeed
Podcast Motor
Seriously Simple Podcasting
8/27/2019 • 37 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode 458 | The Return of Mike Taber
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Mike returns to the podcast to give updates on the fate of Bluetick as well as progress updates on his motivation and health.
Items mentioned in this episode:
BlueTick
Seriously Simple Podcasting
FounderCafe
8/20/2019 • 52 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 457 | Starting a Marketplace, Marketing Channels, Resellers, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob answers a number of listener questions on topics including starting a marketplace, marketing channels, resellers and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Kiwi for Gmail
TaskTrain
RobWalling.com
8/13/2019 • 28 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode 456 | Launching a 2nd Product + Revisiting Freemium with Ruben Gamez
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob interviews Ruben Gamez of Bidsketch, about his 10 plus years of bootstrapping, lessons learned, improved decision making, and his new product.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Docsketch
FounderCafe
ZenFounder
AppSumo
8/6/2019 • 47 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 455 | “Things I Would Have Done Differently” with Tracy Osborn of WeddingLovely
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Tracy Osborn about things she would of done differently during the 9 years she ran WeddingLovely.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TracyOsborn.com
TinySeed
7/30/2019 • 48 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode 454 | Overcoming Fear (Throwback Episode)
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob does a throwback episode. Almost 9 years to the day Rob and Mike published episode 14 about overcoming fear and taking risks which is a message that is still applicable today.
7/23/2019 • 32 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 453 | How a Non-Technical Founder Built and Sold a Multi-million Dollar SaaS Startup with Jeff Epstein
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob interviews Jeff Epstein, Founder of Ambassador, about building and selling his multi-million dollar startup as a non-technical founder. They dive deep into the details of the acquisition and the toll it took on him.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
Ambassador
7/16/2019 • 45 minutes, 20 seconds
Episode 452 | LinkedIn Outreach, New Features vs. Fixing Bugs and More Listener Questions with Jordan Gal
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Jordan Gal answer a number of listener questions on topics including LinkedIn outreach, building features versus fixing bugs and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
CartHook
UpCounsel
Baremetrics
Balsamiq
Bootstrapped Web
7/9/2019 • 36 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode 451 | Stellar Growth, Platform Risk, Layoffs and Powering Through Roadblocks with Laura Roeder
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of US, Rob interview Laura Roeder, Founder and CEO of MeetEdgar. They talk about her fast success with growing MeetEdgar, dealing with platform risks, and the humbling experience with her second venture.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Laura Roeder.com
Customer.io
TinySeed
7/2/2019 • 45 minutes, 45 seconds
Episode 450 | Founder Hotseat: Matt Wensing of SimSaaS on Making Consistent, Needle-Moving Progress
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of US, Rob does a Founder Hotseat interview with Matt Wensing of SimSaaS. They talk about how to develop a strong cadence of work as a one person company.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Riskpulse
TinySeed
6/25/2019 • 44 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 449 | Two-Sided Marketplaces, How Much Testing is Too Much, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob along with co-host Tracy Osborn answer a number of listener questions on topics including two side marketplaces, automated testing, building like-minded relationships and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
Tracy Osborn
6/18/2019 • 35 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode 448 | Let’s Talk About Bluetick
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the current status of Bluetick. They discuss the Google approval process, external/internal motivations, current roadblocks, and Mike's future with Bluetick.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick
Mailbird
Referral Rock
MastermindJam
6/11/2019 • 52 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode 447 | Platform Risk, Pricing, and Customer Development
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including pricing and customer development. They also continue to discuss Mike's verification journey with Google.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Churn Buster
CartHook
Derrick Reimer
6/4/2019 • 39 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 446 | How to Build More Successful Integrations
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about how to build more successful integrations. They discuss how to approach the different areas of risk including work estimates, API integration, co-marketing opportunities and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
Bluetick
Baremetrics
Stripe
5/28/2019 • 34 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode 445 | Why Absolute Thinking Is ALWAYS Bad
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about some of the pitfalls of absolute thinking. Things are rarely black and white, they are more nuanced and on a spectrum. The guys explore the advantages to this approach.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Gusto
Secret Stache
Big Snow Tiny Conf
Teamwork Desk
Help Scout
VidHug
5/21/2019 • 50 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode 444 | Our Biggest Regrets, Feelings of Isolation, Impact of Management Tasks on Deep Work and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including what are their biggest regrets, how to deal with the loneliness of building a startup, and task management.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe
Mailbird
Mailplane
ZenFounder
5/14/2019 • 40 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 443 | Determining Which Signals Matter, Staying on Task Without Extrinsic Motivation, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including which signals matter, staying on task without external motivation, and how they manage their time.
Items mentioned in this episode:
HR.com
Bidsketch
MastermindJam
ZenFounder Podcast
5/7/2019 • 40 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 442 | Corporate Structures and How the Choice You Make Now Can Impact You Years Down the Line
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Einar Vollset talk through the different kinds of corporate entities, how they differ, and how they can impact you in the future.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
LegalZoom
4/30/2019 • 27 minutes, 52 seconds
Episode 441 | Revisiting 2019 Goals, Why Remote Companies Grow Slower, and A Couple Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike revisit their 2019 goals. The guys check in to see if they are on pace with their 2019 goals as well as discuss some other topics including why remote companies grow slower.
Items mentioned in this episode:
FE International
Fearless Salary Negotiation
Position Health
4/23/2019 • 47 minutes, 51 seconds
Episode 440 | How to Build Case Studies That Don’t Suck
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the process of putting together a case study and reasons why you would do it. They also share some additional thoughts on this years MicroConf and its future.
Items mentioned in this episode:
FE International
Gumroad
Episode Sources
neilpatel.com
articulatemarketing.com
coschedule.com
hubspot.com
4/16/2019 • 29 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 439 | 9 Key Takeaways from MicroConf 2019
Show Note
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about their 9 key takeaways from MicroConf 2019. They give a brief synopsis of some of the talks from both starter and growth edition.
Items mentioned in this episode:
CartHook
Leadfuze
MicroConf Recap
Art of Product Podcast
Punchline Copy
MicroConf Europe
4/9/2019 • 34 minutes, 4 seconds
Episode 438 | Casual Conversations with Rob & Mike
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike have a casual conversation about what's going on with each other recently. Some of the topics they touch on include Dungeons & Dragons, personal computer setups, new ideas for MicroConf, and Bluetick/TinySeed updates.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
Bluetick
TinySeed
4/2/2019 • 38 minutes, 45 seconds
Episode 437 | Monetizing B2C, Selling a Small SaaS, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of US, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including monetizing B2C, selling a small SaaS,and insurance. They also get a update from a past listener's question.
Items mentioned in this episode:
FE International
MicroConf
Robwalling.com/london
VidHug
Flowlog
3/26/2019 • 40 minutes, 37 seconds
Episode 436 | How to Respond to Customer Suggestions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about how to respond to customer suggestions. The topic was inspired by a Tweet by Ken Wallace, the guys give six approaches they use to tackle this issue as well as some additional thoughts.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Mike's HR.com Webcast
Robwalling.com/London
SFTROU Ep.119
MastermindJam
3/19/2019 • 31 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode 435 | The Value of Startup Accelerators, Better Onboarding, Liability Insurance, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including the value of startup accelerators, onboarding, liability insurance and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
AppSumo
MicroConf
Clocr.com
Founder Shield
Sports Tracker App
3/12/2019 • 35 minutes, 52 seconds
Episode 434 | SaaS KPIs You Should Focus on From Day 1
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about what KPI's to look at when launching, key metrics you should track, and what they should be.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
HR.com
Sunrise KPI
Cyfe
3/5/2019 • 39 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode 433 | Managing Your Emotions, the Cost of an MVP, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including managing emotions, cost of an MVP, taking a business idea and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf 2019 Starter Edition Scholarship Application
VidHug
OneOneMeeting
2/26/2019 • 39 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 432 | How to Indirectly Overcome Sales Objections
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about how to indirectly overcome sales objections. Solving the problem of having to answer some of the same questions numerous times, the guys come up with some ways to combat sale objections when you're not in a direct conversation with the potential customer.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Starter Edition Scholarship Application
TinySeed
HubSpot
Leadpages
Kissmetrics
2/19/2019 • 28 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode 431 | Converting Free Users to Paid, Vesting, Business Ethics, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including converting free users to paid, vesting, business ethics and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick.io
2/12/2019 • 38 minutes, 20 seconds
Episode 430 | What to Look For In a Co-Founder
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about what to look for in a co-founder. They touch on different aspects of evaluating someone for the role including, honesty/integrity, skill-set vs. future skill-set, fixed mindset vs. growth and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
AppSumo MicroConf Giveaway
MicroConf Starter Edition Scholarship Application
MicroConf Growth Edition
MicroConf Starter Edition
Big Snow Tiny Conf
TinySeed
CartHook
2/5/2019 • 34 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode 429 | Building a Launch List of 5,900 and Grinding Out Customer Development
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Derrick Reimer about his new product Level. They go through the development timeline as Derrick gives insights on the early access phase, alpha testing, taking pre-orders, and going live with the MVP.
Items mentioned in this episode:
AppSumo MicroConf Giveaway
MicroConf Growth Edition
MicroConf Starter Edition
Level.app
The Art of Product
1/29/2019 • 38 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode 428 | Building Relationships with Agency Partners, Determining Equity Splits, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including building relationships with agency partners, selling across different currencies, determining equity splits, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
AppSumo MicroConf Giveaway Contest
MicroConf Growth Edition
MicroConf Starter Edition
OpenCage Geocoder
FE International
Quiet Light Brokerage
1/22/2019 • 28 minutes, 37 seconds
Episode 427 | Scaling a Software Product, Raising Prices, When to Consider CRM, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions, the topics include scaling a software product, raising prices, and when to use a CRM.
Items mentioned in this episode:
AppSumo-MicroConf Giveaway
MicroConf Growth Edition
MicroConf Starter Edition
AppSumo
Segment
Stripe
Zendesk
1/15/2019 • 27 minutes, 27 seconds
Episode 426 | Getting Started with Event Tracking
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about getting started with event tracking. They share some tips and tricks, 3 Core Lifecycle Events, and the purpose/importance for tracking each event.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Segment Blog
Segment Google Doc Spreadsheet
ZenFounder 193-"Rob’s Favorite Productivity Hacks"
1/8/2019 • 25 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 425 | How to Launch a Product Into a Mature Market
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about how to launch a product into a mature market. They give a definition of what a mature market is, list some examples of established players in different markets, discuss how to tell if you should enter a particular market and how to execute on it.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Salesforce
HubSpot
Stripe
Level
Gusto
Drip
Superhuman
1/1/2019 • 37 minutes, 27 seconds
Episode 424 | Our Predictions for 2019
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike make their predictions for 2019. They also look back at their 2018 predictions and rate how they did.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Start Small, Stay Small(Audio Book)
StartupBook.net
TinySeed
12/25/2018 • 41 minutes, 27 seconds
Episode 423 | Our Goals for 2019
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike set their goals for 2019 as well check in and rate how they did for their 2018 goals.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Hacker News
Rob's Hacker Noon Interview
TinySeed
MicroConf
FounderCafe
12/18/2018 • 46 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 422 | Impact of GDPR on Mailing Lists, Keyword Stuffing, Shady Competition, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including the impact of GDPR, pruning e-mail lists, TinySeed and more.
Items mentioned in this epiosode:
TinySeed
Drip Workflow Re-Engagement
12/11/2018 • 39 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode 421 | The “Science” of Why “Charge More” Works
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us inspired by a Patrick McKenzie tweet, Rob and Mike talk about the science of why charging more works.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Patrick McKenzie Tweet
MicroConf
FounderCafe
TinySeed
Joel Spolsky " Camels and Rubber Duckies"
Joel Spolsky " Price as Signal"
12/4/2018 • 32 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode 420 | An Alternative Form of Startup Funding
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Einar Vollset talk about their alternative form of startup funding, Tiny Seed. They talk about why they started an accelerator, and some of the key differentiators that separates them from typical accelerators.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Einar Vollset Twitter
MicroConf
Indie.VC
SparkToro
ZenFounder
Baremetrics
11/27/2018 • 30 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode 419 | VC Prospecting Emails, Building Features vs. Integrations and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including VC prospecting emails, building features vs. integration, buying software businesses and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
RobWalling.com
TinySeed
ZenFounder Ep.193-"Productivity Hacks"
Flippa
All Side Projects
1Kprojects.com
FE International
QuietLight Brokerage
Empire Flippers
11/20/2018 • 31 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode 418 | Creators Versus Fans
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about creators versus fans. They discuss some cautionary tales of building products on someone else's platform and the potential risks.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
BlueTick
D&D Beyond
Resources
The Power Struggle for Dungeons & Dragons’ Soul
Wizards.com
11/13/2018 • 36 minutes, 42 seconds
Episode 417 | Pulling Out Profits, Building Features vs. Integrating, Marketing a Podcast, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including how to market a podcast, what to do with business profits, building features vs. integrating and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
ZoomAdmin
Big Snow Tiny Conf
Business of Software Conference
FemtoConf
Brian Casel "Tiny Conferences"
11/6/2018 • 33 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 416 | MicroConf Europe 2018 Recap
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike recap MicroConf Europe 2018. The guys go through the list of speakers of the two day event and highlight some of their key takeaways from each presentation.
Picture of Rob in the Iron Throne
Picture of Mike in the Iron Throne
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe 2018
Walls of Dubrovnik
TinySeed
FE International
SureSwift Capital
10/30/2018 • 27 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode 415 | Product-Founder Fit, Stairstepping, Free Trials vs. Money Back Guarantees, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including trials versus money back guarantees, product founder fit, the stair-step approach, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe
The Complete Developer Podcast
ZenFounder
The Single Founder Handbook
10/23/2018 • 41 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode 414 | Content Promotion Tactics
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about content promotion tactics. Breaking the tactics down in three categories (Social Media, SEO, and E-mail Marketing), the guys share thoughts and expand based on some previously written articles on the topic.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TinySeed
ZenFounder
SaaS Mag
Episode Resources
Orbit Media
NeilPatel.com
10/16/2018 • 33 minutes, 52 seconds
Episode 413 | How Lucidchart Grew to 13 Million Users with Freemium
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about how Lucidchart grew to 13 million users with freemium. They point out effective ways to use freemium, viral loops, horizontal markets, and how you could incorporate some of these things in your bootstrapped startup.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Freshworks Article
Fog Creek
Stack Overflow
Stripe
AnyDice
10/9/2018 • 30 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode 412 | The Pitfalls of Several Commonly Recommended Marketing Tactics
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the pitfalls of commonly recommended marketing tactics. This topic was inspired by a tweet from Scott Watermasysk from KickoffLabs. Some of the tactics discussed include split testing, affiliate programs, content marketing, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
KickoffLabs
Teamwork
Product Hunt
Hacker News
Indie Hackers
MicroConf Europe
10/2/2018 • 31 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode 411 | Bootstrapping vs. Funding: 19 Questions To Ask
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about bootstrapping versus funding. It is a common question new entrepreneurs ask themselves and based on an article on the subject, the guys comment and elaborate on some of these questions.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Four Color of Money Article
Gumroad
9/25/2018 • 30 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode 410 | Customer Development for Dummies
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about customer development. Based on a Sujan Patel article, the guys walk through 5 tips for doing customer development the right way.
Items mentioned in this episode:
TaskTrain
Product Habits
Five Second Test
UserTesting
Board Gaming Table Kickstarter
9/18/2018 • 32 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode 409 | Defining Product/Market Fit, Using Inexpensive Developers, When to Quit, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions. The topics include defining product market fit, using cheap developers, when to quit, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
The Quiet Light Podcast w/ Rob Walling
FounderCafe
Closer Sharing
Sean Ellis: 40% “very disappointed”
9/11/2018 • 36 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode 408 | Should You Take on a Co-founder?
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer the questions, should you take on a co-founder? The guys discuss the difference between hiring and being a partner, how to begin a partnership, and how to do if you're a good fit.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe Tickets
CartHook
9/4/2018 • 38 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode 407 | A SaaS Pricing Conundrum, Subdomains, Building an Affordable MVP, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us , Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including SaaS pricing, subdomains, and building affordable MVP's.
Items mentioned in this episode:
AllTheGuides
WP Engine
AppsEvents
EventsFrame
Balsamiq
8/28/2018 • 36 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode 406 | Should Bootstrappers Raise Money?
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer the question of should bootstrappers raise money? The guys distinguish the difference between venture capital and angel investing and how raising an angel round may be a good fit for some types of entrepreneurs.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Indie Hackers
Transistor.fm
Indie.vc
Churn Buster
LeadFuze
CartHook
RobWalling.com
8/21/2018 • 40 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode 405 | Minimum Viable Security, Moving on from AuditShark, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions on topics including Mike's thoughts on moving on from AuditShark, minimum viable security, and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Indie Hackers Podcast with Mike Taber
Release Notes Podcast with Mike Taber
Segment
Zapier
Nomad List
Comics 'N' Coffee
Medium.com Post
Medium.com Post #2
Safestack.io Post (Security)
SaaS Security Checklist
8/14/2018 • 39 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode 404 | How to Dissect Your Business Competitors
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about how to dissect your business competitors. Gaining insight can help with validating an ideas and understanding the landscape. The guys give you 8 ways to better understand your competitors.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe
FounderCafe
Rank2Traffic
8/7/2018 • 30 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode 403 | Should You Love What You’re Working On?
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike ask the question: should you love what you're working on? The guys talk about this topic in the idea of balancing interests and opportunity. They also ask themselves the question and how it pertains to their lives and businesses.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Enneagram Institute
FounderCafe
7/31/2018 • 31 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 402 | Tactics for Minimizing Disruptions to Your Vacation
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about some tactics for minimizing disruptions to your vacation. Sometimes, it's really tough to feel like you can unplug as an entrepreneur, especially if you're running a SaaS. The guys breakdown some things you should do for your next vacation.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe
FounderCafe
Uptime.com
Ropig
Pingdom
7/24/2018 • 27 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode 401 | Why You Shouldn’t Listen to Your Customers (And What You Should Do Instead)
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about why you shouldn't listen to your customers. Not all requests are created equal. The guys breakdown customer feature requests into three categories and give tips on how to get the most out of them.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick
Zapier
Segment
Startup Stories Podcast
7/17/2018 • 25 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode 400 | The Importance of Consistency
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the importance of consistency. They reminisce about how the podcast has evolved over the years and the benefits of putting an episode out week after week.
Items mentioned in this episode:
FounderCafe
BoardGame Tables
MicroConf
Inc.com Article
Uexpress.com Article
differenceconsulting.com Article
7/10/2018 • 43 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode 399 | How Derrick Reimer is Validating His Ambitious Third SaaS Application
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob talks with Derrick Reimer, co-founder of Drip, about his new SaaS application Level. They talk about what inspired the idea as well as ways Derrick went about trying to validate it.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Level
DerrickReimer.com
The Art of Product
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about SaaS marketing lessons you'll wish you'd learned sooner. Based on an article on karolakarlson.com they break the list down to 9 key lessons including growth plans, mission statements, tracking metrics and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Karolakarlson Article
Robwalling.com
Firstround.com Article
6/26/2018 • 30 minutes, 4 seconds
Episode 397 | Customer Acquisition Strategies
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about customer acquisition strategies. Based on a themarketingstudent.com article, they break down the difference between strategies versus tactics and how to think about your acquisition strategy.
Items mentioned in this article:
Zoom
YouCanBook.Me
MicroConf Europe
Equipment Wallet
6/19/2018 • 27 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode 396 | Revisiting 2018 Goals, Raising Funding, Marketing at Events, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike check in with their 2018 goals, and answer listener questions on topics including raising funding and marketing at events.
Items mentioned in this episode:
ZenFounder
Swaaap.com
EconTalk
RogueStartups
Bitesize Irish Gaelic
6/12/2018 • 41 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode 395 | 20 Podcasts We Like
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the 20 podcasts they listen to. They separate the podcasts into three categories, bootstrapping, startups/business, and off topic/entertainment.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Europe
CartHook
Big Snow Tiny Conf
Transistor.fm
Podcast Motor
Recapture.io
Baremetrics
Podcasts mentioned:
The Art of Product
Build Your SaaS
Bootstrapped Web
Founder's Journey
Hooked on Product
RogueStartups
The Tropical MBA
Indie Hackers
ZenFounder
This Week in Startups
Startup
Akimbo
Stacking Benjamins
Money For The Rest Of Us
Planet Money
Reply All
Daily Tech Headlines
Current Geek
99% Invisible
System Mastery
6/5/2018 • 47 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode 394 | Soft Skills for Entrepreneurs
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about soft skills for entrepreneurs. They define what soft skills are and list 5 of them that you need to develop as an entrepreneur.
Items mentioned in this episode:
The Art of Product Podcast
Inflection
Software By Rob
Bluetick.io
5/29/2018 • 32 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode 393 | Marketing and Growth Questions Answered
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer marketing and growth questions as well as give advice on starting a new venture.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Hooked on Products
Build Your SaaS
The Art of Product
Zencastr
MicroConf Recap
5/22/2018 • 34 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode 392 | 10 Key Takeaways from MicroConf 2018
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about their 10 key takeaways from MicroConf 2018.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf Videos On-Demand
MicroConf Recap
Stripe
Teachable
BoardGameTables
5/15/2018 • 33 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode 391 | The 5 Stages of Your Sales Funnel & Tools to Use At Each One
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the 5 stages of your sales funnel and tools you can use at each stage. This episode is based off of a Ignite Visibility article, the guys give their takes on the points made in the article as well as add additional tool options.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Unbounce
CrazyEgg
Hotjar
Salesforce
Clicky
Mixpanel
Kissmetrics
Amplitude
5/8/2018 • 25 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode 390 | SaaS Pricing, Sponsoring Events, Subscription Boxes and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions. The topics in this episode include GDPR, SaaS pricing, sponsoring events as a marketing strategy and subscription box companies.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
ZenFounder
RobWalling.com
FounderCafe
Cloudforecast.io
Crated with Love
Bigfoot Capital Solutions
Angel List
5/1/2018 • 32 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode 389 | Pro Tips for Attending Conferences
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike share tips for attending conferences. They discuss things to do before, during, and after a conference in order to get the most out of the event.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
Justin Jackson's Post
4/24/2018 • 40 minutes, 50 seconds
Episode 388 | GDPR, Why You Should Strive For High Prices, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike continue their discussion on GDPR and get additional insight from a listener. They also talk about why to strive for higher price points.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
Userlist.io
Derrick Reimer Blog Post
MyTurtleBook.com
Teamwork
4/17/2018 • 45 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode 387 | Before You Run Any Facebook Ads, Listen to This
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Mike interviews Mojca Mars, a Facebook Ads expert, about what things you need to do before you even begin running Facebook ads. Some of the topics discussed include lead magnets, custom audiences, email sequences and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
MicroConf
Super Spicy Media
The Facebook Ads Academy
Mojca Twitter
4/10/2018 • 45 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode 386 | Balancing Feature Development with Marketing, the Cost of Technical Debt, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions. The topics include balancing development and marketing, overcoming hesitations about partnering, and the costs of technical debt.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Drip
MicroConf
Business of Software
4/3/2018 • 42 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 385 | GDPR, Preparing to be Acquired, Technical Debt, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about GDPR, preparing to be acquired, and technical debt. With the regulations of GDPR coming into effect, the guys discuss how it will affect small businesses and what you should do. Also an in depth discussion on things to have in order before you get acquired.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Mike's Indie Hackers Article
Mike's Interview on Product People
Sherry Walling Interview on Mixergy
FemtoConf Recap
3/27/2018 • 41 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode 384 | Bluetick Marketing Plan Teardown
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike talk about the Bluetick marketing plan. Mike breaks down his plan in three categories, one-time, ongoing, and long-term. The two go back and forth on the most effective strategies for each category.
Items mentioned in this episode:
Bluetick
FemtoConf
Price Intelligently
Product Hunt
CSS Gallery List
LeadFuze
Whitetail Software
Zapier
3/20/2018 • 41 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode 383 | Considering Monetizing SaaS with Ads, Should a WP Plugin Company Consider SaaS, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob flies solo and answers a number of listener questions. The topics include monetizing SaaS with ads, should a WP plugin company consider SaaS and more.
Items mentioned in this episode:
ZenFounder
Startup Blueprint: 7 Skills For Founders, Builders & Leaders
Start Small, Stay Small: A Developer's Guide to Launching a Startup
3/13/2018 • 25 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode 382 | Fixing Onboarding, Marketing a Low LTV Product, and More Listener Questions
Show Notes
In this episode of Startups For The Rest Of Us, Rob and Mike answer a number of listener questions, topics include fixing onboarding, marketing a low LTV product, and the legality of cold email.
Items mentioned in this episode:
FemtoConf
Bluetick
MicroConf
Indie Hackers
Gary Con
uTheory